Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

quantities. and phases when you need it. and residential. and plans. In the Revit Architecture model.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. 12 Select DefaultMetric. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. scope. you will use the default template. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. review the Revit Architecture templates. drawing sheets. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the floor or roof remains connected. hence. 13 Click OK. and customize the project as necessary. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. construction. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. every drawing sheet. If the length of the elevation is changed. click Training Files. For most tutorial projects. sections. and schedules required for a building project. In this case. schedules. how to navigate the user interface. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. If you move the partition. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. As you work in drawing and schedule views. 2D and 3D view. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and click Open. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In this case. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is one of association or connection.rte. drawings. the operation of the software is parametric. the hierarchy of elements. You learn the terminology. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and open Metric\Templates.

and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. If you can draw. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. and roofs are model elements. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. doors. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. windows. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. doors. levels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. filled regions. Understanding the Basics | 7 . programming is not required.When you change something. They display in relevant views of the model. grids. They help to describe or document the model. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. tags. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. Examples include detail lines. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. For example. and cabinets are model components. walls and roofs are hosts. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. windows. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls. tags.

elevation views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Often. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.In Revit Architecture. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. such as roofs. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. from geometry to construction data. schedules. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. and ceilings. first floor. and drawings of the design. The project file contains all information for the building design. you must be in a section or elevation view. you can explicitly control them. and so forth). The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. However. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. views of the project. By using a single project file. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. floors. families. Most often. or bottom of foundation. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. and types. for example. To place levels. for example. Project: In Revit Architecture. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. section views. you do nothing to establish these relationships. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . This information includes components used to design the model. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. In other cases.

■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). A type can be a specific size of a family. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. dimensions. categories of model elements include walls and beams. For example. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. identical use. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. making it easy to understand what each button represents. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. However. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. For example. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. ceilings. In the following illustration. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. In the steps that follow. System families include walls. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A type can also be a style. For example. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). learning Revit Architecture is much easier. and similar graphical representation.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. roofs. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. the user interface is labeled. and levels. System families can be transferred between projects. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . specifically its clear user interface. floors.

The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. This creates a new project based on the default template. In addition.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. click (New). By default. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Edit. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. which are listed on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. you type the required key combination to perform the command. For example. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. While working in the drawing area. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . a door type is specified. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. when you add a door. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. When you select the Door tool. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 9 In the Type Selector.

you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 .

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser.11 Click OK. select Views (all). ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. In the Project Browser. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar.

Navigating the User Interface | 15 . and rename views. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. family category (doors. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. elevations. delete. families. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. double-click its name.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The browser is dockable. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. windows). schedules. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. 3D). walls. and group name. sheets. To open a view. and groups. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. reports.

You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. Do not click. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. After creating a browser organization scheme. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. click Cancel. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. In the bottom left corner of the window.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. The cursor displays as a pencil. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Wall. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case.

Click the Help button. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). When you place the cursor over an element. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can also press SHIFT+F1. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. click Modify to end the Wall command. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. If no Help button displays. You can use this tri-pane. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. After you are familiar with these tasks. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. press F1 for context-sensitive help. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. 20 Press TAB. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. It highlights when the cursor is over it. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. Windows: From any window. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. In addition. Toolbar: From the toolbar. click on the Standard toolbar. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. find a keyword on the Index tab. Tooltips: To see tooltips. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. The status bar also provides information. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. There are several tools that help you find information. In the status bar.18 On the Design Bar. in conjunction with tooltips. regarding selected elements in a view. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. press F1 for help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 .

click Training Files. 5 On the View toolbar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. For example. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the following steps.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. the view zooms out from the building model. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.

and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. NOTE As you zoom in and out. As you move the mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 10 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. . Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 7 Click in the drawing area. To modify or add snap increments. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. on the View toolbar. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 6 Click Zoom To Fit.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. the view zooms in on the selected area. If you do not have a wheel mouse.

Similar controls. For more information about SteeringWheels. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and double-click 2nd Flr. referred to as shape handles. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying a building model. Small blue dots. called drag controls. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . bottoms. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and click the SteeringWheels tab. and then using the Zoom tool again. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. Cnst. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. 17 Type ZR. as shown. These are the drag controls. expand Views (all). click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. press ESC. display along the ends.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. moving the wheel to the desired location. 15 To exit the wheel. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and click Help. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.

click (Move). for example. click to specify the starting position. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . In this case. and on the Tools toolbar. you want to move the table closer to the wall. such as Move and Copy. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. The table moves down. Some commands. After selecting the element to move. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. to lengthen the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). click Lines. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. on the Standard toolbar. Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. and click again to end it. 26 On the Undo menu. or press CTRL+Z. and drag it on top of the table. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. select the second item in the list. In this example. Some commands. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. such as the Lines command. click the Undo command. 24 Select the plant. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar. 30 Close the file without saving your changes. click Modify. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

27 . illustrating how building components work together. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. In Revit Architecture. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. detail. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. this tutorial uses imperial units only.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. Use detail components to define an assembly. and annotate building assemblies. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. or referenced as a drafting view. In this tutorial. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. When you have finished these tutorials.

verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Drafting View. enter Window Head Detail. and reference a drafting view.rvt.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and click OK. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. scroll until the folder is displayed. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. import a DWG detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 3 In the Scale list. create a reference callout. you will create a drafting view. If necessary.

Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 9 Type ZR. displaying the extents of the detail. 6 In the Colors field list.In the Project Browser. located directly to the left of the drawing area.dwg. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. The model zooms out. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. as shown. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. The drawing area is still blank. select Black and White. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. and click Open. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.). which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog.

13 Click Reference other view. to activate the view selection list. click Callout. 12 On the Options Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. and in the Scale list. 14 In the drawing area. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Detail View: Detail.The view displays to the specified area. in the Type Selector.

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.The reference callout is created. adjust the detail view display settings. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. c_express_workshop_details_start. and in the Scale list. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 2 On the Options Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area.rvt. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. in the Type Selector. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. double-click the reference callout tag head. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select Callout. 3 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.

7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 6 In the drawing area. 8 On the Design Bar. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. under Detail Views (Detail). for Name. enter Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0. click Modify to clear the selection. 5 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. under Detail Views(Detail). double-click Wall Base 1. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click OK. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 14 In the drawing area.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. click (Hide Crop Region). under Graphics. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. for Display Model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 16 Click OK. and click View Properties. right-click. select As Underlay.

click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. typical details can easily be placed.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. Stud. 20 In the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. type 1' 6''.Brick on Mtl. and press ENTER. By grouping detail components. on the Options Bar. click Detail Components. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. Directly above the drawing area. 19 In the Type Selector. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 17 On the View Control Bar. If the crop region is enlarged. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.

25 In the Project Browser.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. add the following detail components as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. click Modify to end the command. 23 Using the same method. and click Create Instance. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .

Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command.

Leader. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. and Free End are selected. In the next exercise. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. map keynotes by material. and under Keynote Table. click Training Files. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. c_express_workshop_details_start. You can customize this list. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. For more information about customizing a keynote database.txt. click Browse. 4 On the Options Bar. in the type selector. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. special notes. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. for Full Path. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and format keynote styles. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. or instructions within a construction documentation package. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. and verify that Horizontal.

3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. a question mark displays. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. 7 Click to place the leader arm. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. Keynoting | 39 . place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Either move the text inside. If no value has been specified. 8 Click to place the tag. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command.5 In the drawing area.

Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Material. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 15 Select 07 21 00. and click OK. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. 13 Click to place the tag. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 16 In the drawing area.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 12 Click to place the leader arm.

click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Click OK. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number .All items within the selection display in red. legends. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Click Check None. 17 On the Options Bar. Only the keynotes remain selected.Boxed. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Select Keynote Tags. 19 In the Type Selector. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.

42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . but for training purposes. Add labels to a title block.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. In this exercise. In this lesson. Place views on drawing sheets. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. and modify and update the project sheet title block. Update drawing sheet and project information. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet.

3 Click OK. or in the element properties of the title block. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. If necessary. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the Project Browser. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. click Training Files. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Architecture. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog.

You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. click Modify to clear the selection. right-click A602 . NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. To pan. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. 8 On the Design Bar. Click OK. roll the wheel. double-click Checker. under Sheets(all). 9 In the Project Browser. hold down the wheel and drag.Unnamed. 6 In the Title Block. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. and click Rename. Smith and press ENTER. In this tutorial. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. 5 In the drawing area. For Name. you can enter ZE to zoom out. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle.4 Type ZR. To zoom in and out. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. enter A602. enter Sections/Details. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. Then. 7 Enter K. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . click Text. 13 Click OK. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter Design Development. enter 4/10/2008. For Client Name. in the Type Selector. (Left) is selected. For Project Name. 18 On the Options Bar. select the title block. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. enter J. For Project Status. Smith. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 15 In the Options Bar. The Family Editor opens. select Text : 1/8''. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 20 Click and type Project Status. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 16 Type ZR.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area.

to add 28 Using the same method. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. as shown.21 On the Design Bar. click Label. as shown. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. under Category Parameters. select Label : 3/16''. 22 Using the same method. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. 23 On the Design Bar. click Modify to exit the command. add Project Issue Date parameter. and verify that (Top) are selected. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. in the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and click OK. and click. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. click (Load into Project).

place and modify a keynote legend. In this exercise. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. for Name.30 In the Reload Family dialog. for Full Path. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. and click Yes. Next you will create.Project. and under Keynote Table. you will create. to a drawing sheet. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. a viewport displays. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. click Training Files. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. click Browse. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 .txt. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. representing the view or schedule. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Override parameter values of existing types. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. enter Keynote Legend .

Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. on the Appearance tab. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . as shown. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click OK. expand Legends. 8 In the Project Browser.Sections/Details. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Text. and drag Keynote Legend . clear Show Headers.

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.Project as shown. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.

for View Name. not keynotes. The Keynote Legend is now blank. for Filter. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 15 In the Project Browser. as shown. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text.Project. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Detail). 19 Click OK twice.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click Properties. select Filter by sheet. under Legends. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . right-click Keynote Legend . enter Keynote Legend . and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. at the bottom of the Filter tab. and click OK.Sheet.

Title Sheet 1. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.The keynote legend is automatically updated. 2 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. as shown. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. The view remains selected. double-click A0 . The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area.

sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. 3 In the Type Selector.When you place a view on a sheet. 5 In the Project Browser. Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. Revit Architecture displays a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. by default. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. 6 Type ZR. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . or omit view titles from sheets. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. The drawing list remains selected. and zoom in on the drawing list. As part of a construction document set. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can specify text attributes for view titles. as shown. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet.

8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . while pressing SHIFT. and click Properties. including only sheets that contain views. select A602 . under Identity Data.Ceiling Plans.Sections/Details and select A801 . under Sheets (all). The drawing list display is updated. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. clear Appears In Drawing List. right-click the selected sheets.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a curtain wall. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. the wall or column will move with it. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. 57 . If the grid moves. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. For example. After the beginning exercises.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. a central service core. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. it is good practice to test the constraints. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. As you develop the building design.

Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. and residential. views. verify that the second option is selected. you design inside the elevation markers. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. East. under Create new. In views that display elevation markers. you load any required family type that is not in your project. South. 5 Click OK. click New. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. In practice.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In the drawing area in the right pane. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. Creating the Project In this exercise. under Projects. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. such as a door or window. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. West. To create the project file. levels. and click Browse. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. and settings. but contains no geometry. you use a template that is provided with the software. and customize the project as necessary. construction. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. from the product library. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. The project is stored as a single file. you will use the default template. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. notice four elevation markers. click Training Files. with an RVT extension. The new project opens.rte. For this project. locate the Project Browser. 3 Under Template file.

and duplicate levels. you will want to save your work frequently. schedules. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. and elevation views created in the project by the template. display in the south elevation. and delete them. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. and on the General tab. delete. sheets. created by the template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. and other properties. the view you see in the drawing area. and click Training Files. Ceiling Plans. These views are customizable: you can rename them. double-click South. 14 For File name. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. verify that Project Files (*. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. such as schedules and legends. 13 In the file window. duplicate them. as well as change their names. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and families in your project. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). notice the Legends.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 7 If necessary. Families. Two level lines. will be accessible from the Project Browser. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).rvt) is selected. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 10 In the Project Browser. Sheets (all). heights. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. NOTE If you create a project without a template. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. content and building model reports. As you design and document your building model. expand Views (all). Groups. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. view the Save reminder interval.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. then expand Floor Plans. 15 For Save as type. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. 16 Click Save. You can add. change their properties. 8 Under Floor Plans. enter Revit Retail Building. double-click Metric. Schedules/Quantities. reflected ceiling plan views. Creating the Project | 59 . Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. the other levels move and change with it. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. enter 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels on page 60. doors.17 Proceed to the next exercise. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so that when one level moves. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. and windows within the building model. and double-click South. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. expand Views (all). You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. or constrained. You change the names of the 2 default levels. When you begin designing. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You learn how the levels are locked. After you modify the two default levels. to each other.

which should display by default.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. enter -1800. Adding Project Levels | 61 . 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. and press ENTER. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. click Level. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. and press ENTER. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. 14 Click Plan View Types. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Basics. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. As you move the cursor. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. view the Design Bar. enter 0. right-click. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Next. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 16 Enter 3750. If it does not. This is the Options Bar. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By default. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. enter 01 Entry Level. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and press ENTER. and then move it up. When you add the new level. not all the tabs are visible. and press ESC.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. and click OK. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views.

click (Pick Lines). 19 Click OK. or on the Design Bar. you add another level. 26 Press ESC. and rename the corresponding views. click Modify to end the command. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. click Rename. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. using a different option. right-click Level 3.18 In the Project Browser. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and for Offset. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 25 Click to place the level line. under Floor Plans. and enter 02 Level. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. If you create a level by copying it. Next. 23 On the Options Bar. and move it slightly upward. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. enter 3750. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. click Level.

Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. the levels are no longer constrained. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Notice that by moving the top level. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. as shown. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Adding Project Levels | 63 . and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. all the levels move. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. If you select a level and click its lock.

When the grid is complete. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. 3 On the Options Bar. In a later exercise. under Floor Plans. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. and specify the grid line endpoint. In the following exercise. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line. Move the cursor up. On the Design Bar. the column height changes as well. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. double-click 00 Foundation. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. select (Draw). ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. click Modify. so that if the roof elevation changes.

and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 7500 mm. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . click (Pick Lines). use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. On the Options Bar. click Grid. enter 4500 mm. Next. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. On the Options Bar. for Offset. Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and press ENTER. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Enter A. and click to place the line. and for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line.

10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm.8 Press ESC. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. as shown. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and specify the grid line endpoint. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. click Grid. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 11 On the Design Bar.

20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. click Dimension. 21 Press ESC twice. 15 Starting with grid line A. select grid lines C and 3. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 14 On the Options Bar. click (Aligned). 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click Dimension.

30 In the Type Properties dialog. and press ESC. 24 Press ESC. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. At the left endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line 5. Two pins display on the grid lines. 33 On the Design Bar. select grid line 5. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and select None. until it is closer to grid line A. and select grid line A. click Modify. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. By pinning these central grid lines. enter 50mm. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. 31 For End Segments Length. and press ESC. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 29 In the Name dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and click OK. click the value for Center Segment. click Duplicate. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. If necessary. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click . 26 In the drawing area. 32 Click OK twice. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. The pins are hidden. enter 6. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. click Modify.

Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 35 In the Type Selector.5mm Bubble. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). and in the Type Selector.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. 37 Select the grid lines again. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Finish. 39 In the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. and press ESC. 36 On the Design Bar. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click Structural Column. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select all of the grid lines. click Modify. For Place By. select Grid : 6. click (Grid Intersection). and on the Options Bar.

47 Enter 9000. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. 46 On the Options Bar. 45 While pressing CTRL. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. for From. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. If it is unlocked. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Activate Dimensions. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. and unlock it. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. select 01 Entry Level. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select grid line A. 52 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. lock it. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. 48 On the Standard toolbar. Next. click Camera. 43 Press ESC.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

and click OK.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. Adding Beams In this exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views. In the Rename View dialog. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Adding Beams on page 72. When you finish adding beams. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. expand 3D Views. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. named 3D View 1 by default. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. The current view. and click Rename. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. under Views (all). enter To Building. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Right-click 3D View 1. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.

2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The view is currently set to Coarse. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. click Finish. 4 Click Medium. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Beam. view the icons on the View Control Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. the icon on the right side of the scale. Adding Beams | 73 . 3 Click the Detail Level icon . select each grid line. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under 3D Views. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 While pressing CTRL. The selected grid lines display as red. 6 In the Type Selector. click (Create Beam On Grid). double-click 01 Entry Level. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. under Floor Plans. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser.

The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. 13 On the Design Bar. press and hold SHIFT. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. right-click. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. select 06 Roof. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. select 02 Level. 14 Select one of the beams. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. click Modify. double-click 01 Entry Level. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. and click Select All Instances. 12 On the View toolbar. and click OK.

select 06 Roof. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and click Element Properties. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. under 3D Views.to the 5th level. Adding Beams | 75 . under Constraints. 20 Click Cancel. All of the columns display as red. and click Select All Instances. view the Top Level parameter. right-click. under Instance Parameters. for Top Level. 21 With the column selected. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 22 On the Options Bar. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. and click OK. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. resize the view to see the entire structure. double-click To Building. and if necessary. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click. When you created the columns. (Element Properties). 06 Roof. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click 24 Press ESC.

as lines only. double-click South. under Elevations. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. press ESC to exit the command before continuing.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 28 Save the drawing. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. but you want to display them in less detail. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces In this exercise. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 . To better add the braces to the structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces on page 77. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation.

so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation marker arrow. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). click to specify the start point of the brace. click Brace. After you add the final brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. but when placed the braces are placed. press ESC twice. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and when the endpoint snap displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 11 Using the same technique. The associated framing elevation view displays. 8 In the Type Selector.

and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 79 . delete it and redraw it. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. enter 18000 mm.

13 Double-click the 04 Level height. under Floor Plans. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. but this time add them from right to left. double-click 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 14 On the Standard toolbar. enter 10000 mm.

21 Select grid line A. NOTE As you add braces. enter 12000 mm. click Activate Dimensions. 19 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. 23 In the Project Browser.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. under Floor Plans. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Adding Braces | 81 . and press ENTER. as shown in the 3D view below. and on the Options Bar. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. double-click 00 Foundation.

and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. double-click {3D}. 29 In the Project Browser. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and if necessary. under 3D Views. 26 In the Project Browser. 31 Save the drawing. beams. 28 On the Standard toolbar. lock it. click and roof height. double-click South. grid size. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .24 In the Project Browser. and drag it away from the structure. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Creating a Foundation on page 82. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation. under Elevations. Test connectivity of the columns. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm.

The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and expand Structural Foundations. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and press ESC twice. under Extents. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. and how to load specific families into a project. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. under View Depth. After you load the pile cap family. for View Range. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog. click Edit. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click Training Files. In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Creating a Foundation | 83 . and click View Properties. under Floor Plans. 9 Close the warning dialog. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. expand Families. select Unlimited. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Click OK twice. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The pile cap has been added in the view. and drag it to the drawing area. A warning displays. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project.rfa. The foundation pile cap now displays.Before you can add the pile caps. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. double-click 00 Foundation.

and click Create Similar.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. under 3D Views. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. press ESC twice.

Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . under 3D Views.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load new column. beams. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. beam. All columns in the building model display as red. right-click. 2 Select one of the columns. and click Select All Instances. click Training Files. double-click {3D}. and braces that you used to create the building structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and brace families into the project.rvt. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. you change the types of the columns.

enter 75mm. 15 In the Project Browser.5CHS. under Dimensions. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. This not the size that you want to use. but it is the only size of its type currently available.9. and changing its size parameter. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Brace. 6 In the Type Selector.2X101.3 In the Type Selector. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. In the following steps. click Edit/New. The building model displays the round hollow columns. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 10 On the Options Bar. The brace type changes.6X15. for d. select the braces in the elevation one by one. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the braces as well as the beams change. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. and click Select All Instances. 18 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Modify. click Modify. click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. 13 In the Name dialog. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. you change the brace type. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 17 While pressing CTRL. for Type. enter 75mm. 9 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Design Bar.

the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. and click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Under Positioning. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. click Training Files.Origin to Origin. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After the files are linked. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. select Auto .rvt. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.

select Levels 00 through 06. while pressing CTRL. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. and click Select Link. select Multiple. 9 In the drawing area. In this case. and walls could also be copy/monitored. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. however. select the linked Revit model. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click (Copy/Monitor). double-click South. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. Grids. under Elevations.4 In the Project Browser. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. structural members. depending on the project. 6 In the drawing area. After the link is established. click Copy.

under Floor Plans. 16 Click OK. click Finish. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). First. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. click OK. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. for Floor Plan views. right-click Level 1. 13 On the Design Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. and click Delete. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. click Finish mode. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. while pressing SHIFT.10 On the Options Bar. 18 Using the same method. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. The 06 Roof floor plan opens.

19 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 20 In the drawing area. 24 In the New View Template dialog. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. click OK. enter Floor Plans. 25 In the View Templates dialog. under Floor Plans. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click OK. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. right-click. under Floor Plans. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. select the Topography : Surface. 21 In the drawing area. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name. double-click 01 Entry Level.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. and click OK. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. click Camera. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Floor Plans. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Names. double-click Site. select Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 .

92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt. In this exercise. 36 In the Rename View dialog. To create floors. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. stairs. and railings are also created from sketches. Adding Floors on page 92. and click OK. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. right-click 3D View 1. Some other Revit Architecture elements. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. and click Rename. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. such as roofs. Adding Floors In this exercise.35 In the Project Browser. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. enter To Building.

and elements in the current view display as gray. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Dimension. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. click Floor. If the grid changes size. click (Rectangle). On the Options Bar. Adding Floors | 93 . and then the first horizontal grid line. Move the cursor to the left. select the top floor line.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click Lines. You are now in the Sketch Editor. Leave this dimension unlocked. At the top left corner of the grid. On the Sketch tab. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. past the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window.

and click the temporary dimension value. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Move the cursor to the left dimension. ■ 7 On the Design Bar.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. click Modify. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then press ESC. select the top floor line. Enter 300. At the top left corner of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. press ENTER. and change their values to 300 mm.

click Lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Edit. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and lock the dimensions. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. On the Sketch tab. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. Adding Floors | 95 . Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. on the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model.8 Select the floor. click Quit Sketch. and press ESC. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). double-click 02 Level. Next. On the Options Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. under Floor Plans. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. enter 1500mm. Select the three remaining floor lines. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. using a different sketching technique. click Floor.

23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click (Rectangle). The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. click Finish Sketch. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. click Floor. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and a lock icon displays. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click (Align). 14 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. double-click 03 Level. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. Click the locks to constrain the floors. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor.

click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 31 In the Project Browser. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. under Floor Plans. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. select 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. under Views ➤ 3D Views. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click {3D}. and on the Options Bar. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 32 Select the floor. and lock the edges.24 On the Design Bar. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. click Finish Sketch. double-click 01 Entry Level. Adding Floors | 97 . Alternatively. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 30 In the Select Levels dialog.

and press ENTER. Click (Pick Lines). To create the roof. When a blue dashed line displays. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click to place the roof line. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click Training Files.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. ■ ■ For Offset. enter 1800 mm. under Floor Plans. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 06 Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. Adding a Roof on page 98. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. 3 On the Design Bar.

8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). Adding a Roof | 99 . click to place the roof line. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line.6 Select grid line 5. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). and when the blue dashed line displays.

11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).10 Press ESC. select the roof. click Finish Roof. click (Trim/Extend). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. ■ 12 On the Design Bar.

19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. 15 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the section. click (Add new points to the slab shape). on grid D. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. 17 On the Design Bar. enter -100 mm. Adding a Roof | 101 .14 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. click Section. click Modify. and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. move the cursor down below the roof.

select the roof. click Edit. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar.20 On the Design Bar. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. for Structure. click Modify. In section. double-click 06 Roof. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). select Variable. under Construction. for Structure [1]. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. (Element Properties). This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 24 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Roof | 103 . 41 Starting with the left front edge. 38 In the 3D view. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. 37 If necessary. on the View Control Bar. zoom in to the roof. 40 In the Type Selector.Roof Edge. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. click (Default 3D View). select the section line. moving counter-clockwise. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. click OK. click Modify. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. select Fascia : Fascia . In this case. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.31 On the Design Bar. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. and press DELETE. select each edge. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. 33 In the warning dialog. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.

View the roof 43 In the Project Browser.42 On the Design Bar. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. you add a curtain wall. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. the curtain wall resizes with it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. so if you resize the grid.

and move it slightly toward the building interior. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall.rvt. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). for Type. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Edit/New. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1050 mm. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 600 mm. For Level. for Spacing. Under Construction. select 01 Entry Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select 05 Roof Garden. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 2100 mm. click Training Files. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click Wall. click to place the first curtain wall segment. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. For Height. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . click 01 Entry Level. When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. For Offset. under Floor Plans. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. enter Retail Storefront. for Join Condition. click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. The type is saved in the project. 6 In the Name dialog. Click OK twice.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. double-click To Building. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. and trim each curtain wall segment. and lock the dimensions. click (Trim/Extend). dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. click Dimension. you can delete the dimensions. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 On the View Control Bar. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . so they remain in the view. If the grid moves. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. These dimensions are not in a sketch. under 3D Views. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. 13 On the Design Bar. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. If you want to hide them.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior.

Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under the element list. 7 Click OK. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 4 On the Model Categories tab. 6 Under Visibility. 5 Under Visibility. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. All the elements in the list are selected. 2 On the View Control Bar.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. click All. under Views (all). 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and double-click South. and click None. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). To better work with the curtain wall panels. clear one element to clear all the elements. Do not select Columns.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select 1 panel. click Modify. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. select Architectural Elevation. 18 On the View Control Bar. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 16 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 12 With the panels selected. and click OK. select System Panel : Solid. under 3D Views. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. in this case an architectural elevation. in the Type Selector. 17 In the Project Browser. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. press and hold CTRL. double-click {3D}.

double-click South. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click To Building.19 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Zoom to the front of the building. under 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser.

31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select another mullion to the right. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 32 In the Type Selector.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. and unpin it. click Add or Remove Segments. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. and click to select it. 27 On the Options Bar. select One Segment. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.

37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and view the new entrance. and unpin it. press TAB until it is selected. select it.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 36 Zoom in to the first panel.

39 Using the same process. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. 3rd. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. open the North elevation. and 4th panels. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 .38 Press DELETE. remove the mullions from the 2nd.

under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. select 02 Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Graphics. click Training Files. and click View Properties.rvt. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. for Underlay. 3 Right-click in the view. double-click 01 Entry Level.

Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. which indicates you must draw the callout. enter Display Area. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. and click OK. The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . under Floor Plans. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. and click Rename. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. click Callout. and click to complete the callout.

13 Select the section line. as shown. click Section. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 12 Draw a section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 14 Press ESC. right-click. and click Flip Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Wall.135mm Partition (2-hr). and click OK. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Exterior.17 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . Lock both alignments. 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. enter Section Display Area. For Loc Line. click Dimension. expand Sections (Building Section). Click (Rectangle). 25 Press ESC twice. select Basic Wall : Interior . right-click Section 1. 27 On the Options Bar. click (Align). select Wall faces. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. for Prefer. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. double-click 01 Entry Level.

) 36 Press ESC twice. under Sections (Building Section). 37 In the Project Browser. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling. double-click Section Display Area. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Next. and lock the dimension. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Notice that the walls extend to the floor.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. 38 On the View Control Bar. and lock the dimension. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space.

47 In the Project Browser. under Ceiling Plans. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. Select the 02 Level Floor. 43 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 46 Press ESC. under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. and click (Element Properties). On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. under Constraints.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. press TAB until you select the wall chain. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. click Modify. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset From Level. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. click to select it. click (Element Properties). Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . double-click Section Display Area. click Attach. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 41 On the Options Bar. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and click OK. for Base Offset. under Sections.

view the ceiling structure. under Construction. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click (Rotate). under Ceiling Plans. and click . double-click 01 Entry Level. for Structure. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 54 Click OK. click Edit. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New.

60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. enter 45. and press ENTER.

64 On the View Control Bar. 66 Optionally. click Shadows Off. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Shadows On.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views.

you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and click to create a reference plane to the left. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. and for Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. enter 1500 mm. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. Move the cursor over grid line B. and click to create a reference plane to the right. click Ref Plane. and copy it to the 05 Level.

2. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method. C. 6 Select the left reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and 3. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. shorten the right reference plane. click Stairs. click Modify.

■ 14 Draw walls around the stair.225mm Masonry. click Wall. Click (Rectangle). and select the 2nd reference plane. 12 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. The complete stair displays. Move the cursor down. beyond the end of the stair. including its handrails. select Basic Wall : Generic . Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. 10 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. and specify a point. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.

enter 1200 mm. select Wall faces. and lock the alignment. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. click Dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Prefer. Select the interior face of the wall. Select the bottom of the stair. click Align. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and click to select it. and specify a point away from the wall. Lock the dimension. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. Click Modify. 18 Using the same technique.15 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. select the dimension value. Select the wall.

but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. click Door. 23 Select the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . 25 While pressing CTRL. (Undo). a warning displays. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. 27 In the Type Selector. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. and press DELETE. and press DELETE. clear Tag on Placement.21 Select the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. select both reference planes. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 24 On the Standard toolbar. TIP To flip the door swing.

you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors.30 On the Design Bar. for Multistory Top Level. (SteeringWheels). and move the cursor to spin the building model. click Modify. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). select 05 Roof Garden. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. click 36 On the View toolbar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Element Properties). for Base Constraint. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. For Top Constraint. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. (Default 3D View). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. select all 4 walls. (Rectangle). Click OK. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 35 On the View toolbar. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 33 Select the stair. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). but if you view the top level of the building. under Floor Plans. Click OK. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. double-click 01 Entry Level. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Align.

50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. on the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. and click OK. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and lock the alignment. click see the roof. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click (Default 3D View). and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft.

for Base Offset. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 300 mm. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. For Top Constraint. 56 Select the shaft. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click 59 On the View toolbar. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. By offsetting the base. (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). Under Constraints. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.55 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. (SteeringWheels).

double-click 05 Roof Garden. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Wall. and click OK. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. under Floor Plans. for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select 06 Roof. and click View Properties. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . 2 Right-click in the view.

Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. click (Align). You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Basic Wall : Generic . 11 In the Go To View dialog. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. click . 16 On the Design Bar. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. 17 On the Options Bar. click Lines.5 In the Type Selector. and then select the right face of the wall. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. and on the Options Bar. The exact placement is not important. select Elevation: South.225mm Masonry. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. click Edit Profile. 15 In the error dialog. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. and click (Fillet arc). click Remove Constraints. 7 On the Tools toolbar. enter 9750. and press ENTER. and click Open View.

22 In the Project Browser. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. click .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. and click (Circle). and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. double-click {3D}.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk.

under Floor Plans. click Component. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. between grid lines C and D. 3 In the Type Selector. as shown. 5 On the Basics tab. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. and press ESC twice.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.5 Meters.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry .4. select M_RPC Tree . double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Component. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. click Training Files.

5 Meters. and then click OK twice. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. for Type. View the roof. click Lines. click (Default 3D View). 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. For Offset.8 On the View toolbar. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. (Element Properties). click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. select M_RPC Tree . 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click Floor. as shown. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. under Dimensions. 21 On the Design Bar. enter Japanese Cherry 1. under Floor Plans. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. under 3D Views. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.5 Meters. for Height. click Duplicate. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 18 In the Project Browser. 17 While pressing CTRL. double-click {3D}. 16 Click Apply. 11 Select one of the trees. and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 2400 mm. 14 In the Name dialog. enter 1500 mm. select the 2 remaining trees. and on the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New.

27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 29 On the Options Bar.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 25 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. enter 0 mm. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. click (Draw). and click to place the line.

30 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . clear Chain. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 32 Press ESC. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. click (Trim/Extend). 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and click to finish the line. move the cursor up 900 mm.

RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. select Rotate after placement. When you render an image. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. near Column E5. 48 In the Type Selector. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. a photorealistic image displays. In plan view. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. click Component. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Height Offset from Level. 43 Click OK twice. 39 Select the sidewalk. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. and click so he is facing the column.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . and on the Options Bar. 45 Click OK. under Constraints. for Type. as shown: (Element Properties). 49 On the Options Bar. The completed sidewalk displays. enter -250 mm. Next. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 42 In the Name dialog. select M_RPC Male : Alex. click Duplicate.

53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click (Element Properties).NOTE If necessary. 54 In the Type Selector. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. select M_RPC Beetle. and click to place her on the sidewalk. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 52 In the Type Selector. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. about 30 degrees. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. click Camera. 56 Press ESC twice. click the car. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.

Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. under 3D Views. If the sidewalk changes height. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . double-click To Building. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. When you select a host for a component. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. enter -300 mm. double-click West. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. under Constraints.59 In the Element Properties dialog. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. 60 In the Project Browser. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. Next. and click OK. 66 Using the same method. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 64 Select Alex. click Pick Host. for Offset. 65 Click the sidewalk. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 63 Click the sidewalk. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car.

After the service core is positioned. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project.

walls. under Floor Plans. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.rvt. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. 5 On the View toolbar. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. click (Default 3D View). including the stairs. and shaft opening. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. you delete the entire stairwell. click Training Files. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . (SteeringWheels).Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 4 Press DELETE. 3 Select the entire stairwell.

double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. right-click m_RRB_core. expand Model. click OK. and on the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. click (Align). under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and zoom in to the linked instance. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar.rvt. click Modify. and notice that the linked file is listed. 10 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 13 In the drawing area. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. and click Create Instance.

18 Select the core. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. or if the group layout is expected to change. click Ungroup. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . click (top down view). (Default 3D View). ■ ■ Click grid line C.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. 20 On the View toolbar. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and click to align the center. click Modify. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. click 21 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).

22 Proceed to the final exercise.rvt. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. where it is hosted within a railing family.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. click Training Files.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . in the Project Browser. double-click 02 Level. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and click to split the floor. 8 In the Project Browser. The rendering displays. and expand Railings. press and hold CTRL. click Edit. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. expand Families. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. 3 In the Conference project. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click OK. The floor sketch displays. expand Renderings. and Parapet. click (Split). 5 Expand Railing. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 13 On the Tools toolbar.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Handrail only. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. This is the railing that you want to add to your model.rvt. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.rvt. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and open Metric\m_Conference.

24 On the Tools toolbar. and click to draw another line. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click to place it. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Lines. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. click (Align). and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch.15 On the Design Bar. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that Chain is not selected. and click to draw another line. click Modify. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and on the Options Bar. 25 Select grid line B.

26 Select grid line D. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Dimension. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. enter 100 mm. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Align). and lock the alignment. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Revit dialog. 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar.rvt project. For Offset. click Railing. for Type. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Glass. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Railing Properties. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 33 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Lock the dimensions. click Finish Sketch.

37 On the Design Bar. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. 39 Click Finish Sketch. click Dimension. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and a roof garden. NOTE For training purposes. lofty ceilings.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. 153 . Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. exterior fire stairs. slight modifications to the building design have been made. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. balconies. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits.

154 .

155 . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. how to create section and elevation views. elevation. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn how to create new views from existing views.

expand Floor Plans.rvt. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. select Level 2.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser.

14 On the View Control Bar. click the current scale. 11 Under Floor Plans. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click OK. under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. and click 1: 1000. Next. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Vicinity Plan.

rvt.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 16 Right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.rvt. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Building Elevation. under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. select 1:100. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify.

under Elevations. enter South East. for Scale. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 10 In the Rename View dialog. double-click South East. 14 In the Type Selector. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Section. select 1:100. under Views (all). and double-click Level 1. select Section: Building Section.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.

and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

using the blue circular drag grip. 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. expand Sections (Building Section). 23 On the View Control Bar. and double-click Section 1. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. To create each view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

select 1:50. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select Floor Plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Callout.rvt.Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views | 167 .

168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and select the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. and click OK. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. select 1:50. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Type Selector. double-click Section 1. for Scale. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 169 . enter Enlarged Stair Plan. click Callout. click Modify. under Sections (Building Sections).

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.■ Move the cursor diagonally down. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.

18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. expand Detail Views (Details). Creating Callout Views | 171 .

open Metric\Families\Annotations. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. the elevation markers. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. select Custom-Section Head.rvt. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. and click Open.rfa.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

and click OK. click Load into Project. 12 For Section Tag. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Section Tail . notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. scroll to Section Line. 14 In the Object Styles dialog.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Edit/New. . 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 19 Click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK twice. 10 On the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 2. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. clear any others. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 4 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. and click OK. select Section Head . 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. scroll to Section Marks. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. for Section Head. 17 Under Category.Custom. 15 Under Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Name dialog. enter Section Head – Custom.Filled. select the section line. Section Tail – Filled. click Duplicate.5mm Square. and can be applied to the section line. 22 In the Name dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . and click OK. and select 3. enter 12. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project.

click 25 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. clear all others. select the callout. 39 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. 40 Press ESC. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Callout Head. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. 27 Click OK twice. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. .5mm Square. select the current project. for Elevation Tag. select Square. select 12. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click Edit/New. and click Open. 36 In the drawing. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. notice the square elevation markers that display. click Duplicate. . 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. and on the Options Bar. and click OK.5 mm. select 3. for Callout Tag. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Click OK. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. click Load into Project. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. For Line Weight.23 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. For Corner Radius. enter 6 mm. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. On the floor plan. enter 12. 34 In the Name dialog.

50 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Callout Boundary. 43 Under Category. select Dash. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click the Annotation Objects tab. You learn to create view templates. view regions. 45 For Line Pattern. and visual overrides. masking regions. 46 Under Category. scroll down to Callout Boundary. and select 7. filters. 49 Click OK. and select 4. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

under Elevations. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. click (Hide Crop Region). and apply it to multiple elevation views. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. To accomplish this. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View Toolbar. and double-click East. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.rvt. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Show Crop Region). you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Zoom to Fit. The crop region displays as red.Creating a View Template In this exercise. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. elevation markers. 13 On the View Control bar. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. grids. and section lines are now hidden in the view. under Visibility. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Under Visibility. Callouts. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. clear Entourage. levels. Creating a View Template | 177 . 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.

under Elevations. double-click North. and click OK. click Apply. 15 In the New View Template dialog. edit the crop region as before. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view.14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Elevations. 17 In the Project Browser. right-click North. and click Create View Template From View. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 20 Using the same method. 16 In the View Templates dialog. click OK.rvt. and click Apply View Template. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click East.

select Level Below (Level 4). Click OK twice. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and click Properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. under Extents. select Level Below (Level 4). View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . and the exterior area on the south side of the building. for View Range. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. for Bottom. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 2 In the Project Browser. Under View Depth. select Penthouse. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. under Floor Plans. click Edit. for Level.rvt.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Penthouse.

under Extents. Click OK twice. for Level. 6 In the Project Browser. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Under View Depth. right-click. select Level 4. for View Range. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 4. click Edit. and click Properties. select Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. double-click Roof Plan.

Click OK twice. click Edit. Under View Depth. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Options Bar. for Level. 10 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . for View Range. click Plan Region. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Unlimited. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. for Bottom. Move you cursor diagonally. click Region Properties. under Extents. select Unlimited. In the left corner of the building. click Lines. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle).

in this case. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. expand Floor Plans. After you apply the filter. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.17 On the Design Bar. click the Filters tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). click Modify. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

select the red color. click <No Override>. click Add. 14 In the Color dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. click Edit/New. 16 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. and click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. for Pattern. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Rated Walls. 10 On the Filter tab. click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. click Override under Patterns. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 9 Click OK. and click OK. Enter Hr. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. select Fire Rating. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. and click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. select Walls. for Color. 11 Select Rated Walls. and apply a color. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. Select contains. under Categories. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. click (New). under Filters. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. 7 In the Filters dialog. click Remove. 17 Using the same method. under Basic colors. under Projection/Surface. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and click OK. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 .

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. To accomplish this. you obscure geometry in portions of a view.

3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 8 Select the crop region. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the View menu. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Masking Portions of a View | 185 .rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 7 On the View menu. right-click. and click Rename. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown.

14 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown.12 On the Options Bar. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . under Floor Plans. and click 1: 50. click black. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. select Walls. and click Override. right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color.Level 1. for Pattern. and click Rename. 7 Under Cut. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 4 On the View Control Bar. under Visibility. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.rvt. under Pattern Overrides. for Color. 11 Click OK twice. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select Solid fill. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click the current scale. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category.

and click OK. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Modify. clear Grids. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

click <No Override> to apply a color. 21 Under Projection/Surface. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click. for Pattern. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. By using the previous method to make the selection. click Projection Lines. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click OK. for Color. 23 In the Color dialog.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select Dash. click a purple color. under Lines. click Override.

click Modify. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps.28 For Color. select a bright green color. 30 On the Design Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. right-click. click . and click OK twice. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

click .33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. how to add views to the sheets. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Creating Sheets. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click View. select A0 metric. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rvt. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. click Sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click OK. click Training Files.

Unnamed. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. expand Sheets (all). Click OK. enter A101. click Modify. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. For Sheet Number.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. click Modify. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . and select the title block. 5 When the title block highlights. enter Site Plan.

Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 2009. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. for Project Address. enter For Approval. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . under Other. enter 15 May. click Edit. For Project Name. enter 2009-1. For Project Number. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. enter J. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. The new project information displays in the titleblock. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. MA 12345 12 Click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Status. Smith. 11 In the Edit Text dialog.

and click OK. right-click. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Sections A108 . 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs In the following exercise. for Name. select A0 metric.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A107 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.rvt. enter Floor Plan. select the new sheet name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Rename. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A106 . and click OK.Elevations A105 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Save. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to these sheets. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Layout Plan A104 .

drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select Level 1. under Sheets (all). Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A104 . and click to place it. under Floor Plans. and drag it to the sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations. under Sheets (all). 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.Floor Plan. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . The red border around the view no longer displays. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place the view. double-click A102 . The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt.

Sections. click Modify. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. double-click A107 . and click to place it. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. align it with the East elevation. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 12 On the Design Bar.

15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Scale. 16 Select title bar. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . select 1:5. and press TAB until it highlights. . and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. zoom in to the grip.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. move the cursor over it.

under Sheets (all). 18 Under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 19 On the Design Bar.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. double-click Level 1. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click A108 . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.Stairs. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.

right-click. and press ENTER. double-click A107 . 2 Select the building section view. 5 On the Design Bar. In order to do this. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . click Modify. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you must first activate the view on the sheet. under Sheets (all). you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. enter 16700 mm.Sections. and then make changes and deactivate the view. and click Activate View. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.rvt.

Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and click Deactivate View.6 Right-click. After you create the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. You modify the view to hide the view title. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.

Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click. select the new sheet name. and click OK.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. enter T. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. For Sheet Name. enter Title Sheet. select A0 metric. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The camera view displays. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . and click Properties. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. double-click Level 1. click Camera. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK.

click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. Under Extents. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Sheets (all). enter 100000 mm. for Eye Elevation. enter 1500 mm. double-click T .8 On the Options Bar. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. For Far Clip Offset.Title Sheet. 11 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. For Target Elevation. 12 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. select Far Clip Active. enter 18000 mm. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Under Camera. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

for Show title. click Modify. click Edit/New. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. . 22 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.15 With the view selected. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). under Graphics. on the Options Bar. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Size. 25 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. click Modify. click Duplicate. select No. and then click OK. Click Apply. enter 635 mm. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. for Height. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tagging Objects In this lesson. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. such as doors and windows.Level 1. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. 207 . click Training Files.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. such as room and window schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.

Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Load. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method.

14 For Offset. type U18-1. and select the room tag. click Room. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. click Training Files. and the rectangle contains the room tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. 11 In the Tags dialog.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar. click it. and press ENTER. verify that Tag on placement is selected. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click OK. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Modify. type 2400 mm. indicating that it can be edited.

Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . click Modify.18 Click the room text label. 22 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Room. and press ENTER. Dining. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. type Entry. place rooms and tags. Sequential letters are also supported. 23 Using the same method. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2.

27 On the Design Bar. expand Lines.Level 2. and moving clockwise. but they need to be tagged. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). double-click Unit 18 Plan . The rooms are already placed. and click OK. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. on the Model Categories tab. clear Room Separation. 29 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 .30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. you learn how to place door and window tags. expand Floor Plans.rvt. clear Leader. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 11 Using the same method. next to Rows. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. for Name. For 103. The room Number is U17-46. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Storage. click New. 101-106. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. select Corridor. add 5 more rooms. For 102. 10 Edit the number to be 101. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for room 101. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . For 105. type Building Entry. type Corridor.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 104. type Storage.

expand Lines. For Weight. and modify room names. under Visibility. click Override. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.■ For 106. and press ENTER. double-click Level 1. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In the Lines field. you add room separation lines. In the Line Graphics dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Save the file.rvt. type Stair. place rooms from a program list. click the bright green swatch. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. select 9. For Room Separation. Under Custom colors. click the Lines field. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. under Projection/Surface. click the Color field. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 Click OK twice. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.

Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. click Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 9 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Room. draw the horizontal line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. First.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

14 For Offset. select 101 Building Entry. for Room. select 102 Storage. for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). type 2400 mm.

Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 16 Using the same method. place the following rooms. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105).

31 For Key Name. type As Selected. 27 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. (Element Properties). under Constraints. click New. clear Room Bounding. and for all 3 finishes. under Available fields. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. select Rooms. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. click Schedule/Quantities. type Units.21 On the Options Bar. select Base Finish. for Rows. under Category. while pressing CTRL. click 23 On the Design Bar. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 30 On the Options Bar. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and Wall Finish. Floor Finish. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. and click OK. and click Add. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. 24 Open the Room Schedule.

under Schedules/Quantities. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. click (Element Properties). 44 On the Options Bar. and click Properties. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Room Schedule. click Edit. under Floor Plans. 37 Open the Room Schedule. 33 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . and click OK. select Units. under Identity Data. under Other. click Check None. 36 Click OK twice. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 43 In the Filter dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. double-click Level 1. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. for Fields. select Rooms. and click Add. select Units.32 Using the same method. 38 Under U17-8. for Room Style. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. for Available fields. select Room Style.

type Room Type. under Views (all). 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.rvt. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. type Room Type. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.46 Open the Room Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. select Room Style. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. click OK. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Floor Plans. For rooms 102 and 105. 9 In the Project Browser. select Public. under Graphics. for Name. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. click OK. and click Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and 106. (Duplicate). You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and apply it to the Level 1 view. for Color. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. click 5 For Title. 48 Save the file. select Service. 104. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . at the warning prompt. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). and double-click Level 1. click the Color Scheme field. right-click Level 1. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 103.

click Modify. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click Edit. under Schemes. click Edit Color Scheme. 19 On the Options Bar. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . under Visibility. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). click the value in the Color column. select the color legend.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and clear Room Separation. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). clear Visible. click Color Scheme Legend. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 17 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK twice. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. expand Lines. select Room Type. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 30 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. respectively. on the Options Bar. 23 Using the same method. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. select blue. 24 Click OK. type 5 mm. for Size. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. under Custom color. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. for Swatch Width. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. type 25 mm. and click OK. 28 Under Title Text. click Modify. 29 Click OK twice. under Graphics. (Element Properties).22 In the Color dialog.

for Color Scheme. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click OK. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. under Graphics. under Sections. click Edit. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 .Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. right-click Building Section. and select Properties. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Visibility. select Rooms. under Sections. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. double-click Building Section. 35 Click OK twice. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. select Room Type. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog.

for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. click . 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). for Room Style. 46 Click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). under Identity Data. under Identity Data. select Units. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. click Check None. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Public. and click OK. 45 While pressing CTRL.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

select Service. 52 In the Room Style Schedule.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. under Identity Data. double-click Room Style Schedule. for Room Style. and click . Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. type Suites. excluding the stairwell spaces. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 51 On the Options Bar. 54 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . 49 In the Element Properties dialog. under Key Name for the new row. click New. for Rows. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center.

and click OK.55 Click . The color fill extends to the roof. for Room Style. select the room on the left side of the top floor. under Identity Data. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Volume Computations. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. select Suites. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. The color fill will extend to the roof. but not beyond it. verify that At wall finish is selected. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. select Areas and Volumes. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

64 In the Element Properties dialog. 68 Click . 71 Click OK. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog.0. and the living room. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. 72 On the Design Bar. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . type -254 mm. select Level 2.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type 0. 66 Click OK. the dining room. select Loft. click Modify. 70 For Limit Offset. select the stairwell room. under Constraints. . 67 On the first level.

rvt. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under 3D Views.73 Save the file. double-click {3D}. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 9 Using the same method. click Family and Type. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 3 While pressing CTRL. and click Add. Select Grand totals. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select Family and Type. click Modify. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 4 In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Available fields. For Then by. Clear Itemize every instance. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. select Material: Description. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 .EPDM. 5 On the Design Bar. under Category. select Roofs.Insulation on Plywood Deck .

for Fields. and click Add. for Name.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays.40 50. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. click the Formatting tab. 12 Click OK. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and under Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 19 For Type. type Estimated Cost. under Available fields. 20 For Formula. select Currency. select Material: Cost. 17 Click Calculated Value.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. for Material: Cost. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select Material: Area. and click Properties. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click Estimated Cost. select Calculate totals. click Edit. Under Field formatting. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. 21 Click OK. 23 For Field formatting. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. and click OK twice. under Other. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.

An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and reporting the shared parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. 28 For Unit symbol. 30 Click OK twice. and are defined and stored in an external file. 29 Select Use digit grouping. click the Format value. 27 In the Format dialog. you create an exiting plan for the building. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. for Rounding. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. you create a shared parameter file. either within family components or within the project template. not just for currency. regardless of category. tag the line. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Digit grouping. ensuring consistency across families and projects. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 31 Save the file. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. can be used for any number-based parameter. You draw a travel path line. adding the shared parameters to a family. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. creating a generic tag to tag the family. select $. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . for Currency. In this lesson.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. and schedule the total distance of each path. which inserts commas after every three digits.

for Name. click Create. for Name. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select Length. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Groups. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Under Parameters. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click Training Files. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Type of Parameter. 9 Under Parameters. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.rvt. for File name. and click Save.rvt. click Training Files.txt. under Floor Plans. type OfficeStandardsParameters. type Exiting. type Travel Distance. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. type Path ID. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click New. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click OK.

13 Click Apply. in the Load into Projects dialog. for Group parameter under. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. under Dimensions. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. for Travel Distance Formula. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. type Length. and select Instance.rvt. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. select Constraints. 10 Using the same method. 14 On the Design Bar.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. under Parameter Type. and click OK. If you have multiple projects open. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter.rvt. and click Select. otherwise the family loads into the current project. click Add. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. following the equals symbol (=). and click OK. 8 Select Instance. 11 Click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rfa. 9 In the Family Types dialog. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. click Load into Projects. under Parameter Data. 3 On the Design Bar. 15 If necessary. click Family Types. group it under Dimensions. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameters. and click OK. Click Training Files. click Add. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. select Shared parameter. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.

17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. click Training Files. 19 On the Design Bar. click Label. click Label. click parameter(s) to label). 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. under Category Parameters. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Select. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 24 Click OK twice. select Travel Distance. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters.rft. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click (Add Parameter). and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and click OK.

click Load into Projects. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. and press DELETE. for File Name. click Modify. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. select Path ID. and move it down. and click OK. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 35 Save the file.28 On the Design Bar. type M_Travel Distance Tag. 29 In the drawing window. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance.rfa.rvt is selected.

5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.Placing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Component. select Chain. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.rvt. 6 Move the cursor to the right.Tagging. above the exterior door as shown. and click in the center of the corridor. double-click Exiting Plan . Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After the lines are tagged. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.

Level 2. double click Exiting Plan . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 13 While pressing CTRL. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Modify. move the cursor near the right corner. click Component. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Placing.Tagging. under Constraints. type 1-1. and click OK. for Path ID. through the door. and click outside of the building. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor down. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Floor Plans. verify that Chain is selected.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. and click. and click in the stair. and click above the door to the stair. 23 Move the cursor down. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Component. 21 On the Design Bar.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.24 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected.Tagging. type 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. 27 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . type Level 1 Exit Distance. 33 For Name. . Placing. under Constraints. under Category. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. for Path ID. and click OK. click Modify. 30 Using the same method. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 28 While pressing CTRL. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

right-click Level 1 Exit Distance.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. type Level 2 Exit Distance. while pressing CTRL.rvt. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 35 Click the Filter tab. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. type 1-. and click Add. in the third field. in the second field. under Schedules/Quantities. type 2-. for Filter by. select Travel Distance. in the first field. and click Properties. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. select Path ID. 50 Save the file. 42 Click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 49 Click OK twice. under Other. select Path ID. select contains. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 36 For Filter by. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 43 In the Project Browser. select Calculate totals. click Training Files. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 38 For Sort by. and under Field formatting. and in the third field. 46 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. under Available fields. for Filter. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields.

expand C . and click OK. click the Value field. select Walls. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click . select the following fields. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 10 In the schedule.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .152 mm. under Identity Data. and select C1010145 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 4 Under Available fields.Interiors ➤ C10 .Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. under Categories. right-click Generic .Fixed Partitions. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click View. for Assembly Code. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Properties. click the Fields tab. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. right-click the Design Bar.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .Partitions .

1 On the File menu. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Under Directories. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click Next. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. under Database. 11 Click OK 3 times. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. type Revit_Project. 6 Click Finish. click the File Data Source tab. select a location for the database file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.11 Close the exercise file. the database display may be different than that shown. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format.mdb. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. click Create. 3 Click New. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click Next.rvt.mdb). 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. for Database Name. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click OK. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.

in addition to the Id column. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. For example. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Additionally.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project.

262 .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 263 . as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

297 . For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. These components display at the required scale. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. In order to detail from the building model. and metal studs. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. In the callout view. plywood. you trace over the building model geometry. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. add detail components. like a standard door header condition.

region objects. After you add components. you detail the view of the roof edge. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. as well as detail lines. click Training Files.rfa. They are also view specific. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select As underlay. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Training Files. 5 In the alert dialog. click Detail Component. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 7 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. which means that all detail components. Exact location is not important. and click OK. and insulation objects. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click the detail callout head.Detailing the View In this exercise. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. You load detail components. and use the model as an underlay for the detail.rvt.

5mm. 19 On the Design Bar. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. click Repeating Detail. click Modify. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 17 In the drawing area. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Duplicate. and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. enter 406.8 Delete the component. 10 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. for Pattern ➤ Detail. Detailing the View | 299 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog. select Corrugated Metal. click (Element Properties). 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 15 For Spacing. 13 In the Name dialog. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 16 Click OK twice.

verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.rfa. click Training Files. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click (Move). TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. and on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify. click Load. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Open. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 24 In the Type Selector.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component.

and place it in the detail view as shown. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. click Detail Component. you load them as a group from a single file. Detailing the View | 301 . 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Open. 29 On the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click OK. click Training Files. 33 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.Because you still have several components to load.

click the Flip instance arrows. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm.

enter 140mm. select to near side. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. as shown. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click (Move). and on the Edit toolbar. For Offset. 42 Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. ■ Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. click Detail Component. Detailing the View | 303 .Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar.

48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. click Detail Lines. Adding Detail Lines on page 304.rvt. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. and lock the component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. 47 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 51 Click Modify. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. as shown. meaning they display only in this view.45 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 2 In the Type Selector. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal.

select Medium Lines. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. and press ENTER.4 Click Modify. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Thin Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. click Detail Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. For Offset. For Offset. as shown. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. click Detail Lines. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 10 On the Design Bar.

and clear Chain. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. select Chain. click (Draw). 16 On the Options Bar. as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown.

click Detail Lines. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. right-click. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 24 On the View Control Bar. enter 10mm. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. select Thin Lines. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. Click (Pick Lines). select Vapor Barrier. 26 In the Type Selector. When you turn the display model off. and press ENTER. For Offset. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select the Penthouse level line. select Do not display. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 22 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.18 In the Type Selector. draw the detail lines as shown. and click OK. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.

29 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 32 Click Modify. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 30 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR as necessary.

Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes | 309 . click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 6 Click Modify. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Enter the text. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click Dimension. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. and click to place the dimension. click Text.

right-click. Creating Detail Components on page 310. for Suffix. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. click Select All Instances. and click OK.Keynotes. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. and click the dimension text. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. on the Options Bar. click 6 In the Filter dialog. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. enter Typ. under Text Fields. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rvt. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 3 In the Rename View dialog. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.. and save the exercise file. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. click Roof Overhang Detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. (Filter Selection). enter Roof Overhang Detail . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK. and click Rename. select a text note.7 Select the dimension line. and press DELETE.

rft. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Type Selector. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog.7 Click Modify. pressing TAB. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 16 Click Modify. click Training Files. 15 Use a window to select all linework. select all the coping linework. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. while pressing CTRL. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. select Medium Lines. and click Open. and selecting the chain. 14 Click Modify. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment.

click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Load. you place keynotes on objects. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Open. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . and click Save. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and click OK. Adding Keynotes In this exercise.rfa. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to your preferred location. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. clear Detail Items. 21 To place the component.18 In the Save As dialog. 30 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects. 27 On the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the coping. enter Roof Edge. 24 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 28 On the Options Bar. 26 Press DELETE. 25 In the Filter dialog. While pressing SHIFT. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 23 Using a window. 22 Click Modify. 31 Using the same method used previously.Keynotes view is not the open view. and the component can be placed in the detail. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . delete the underlying linework. The original linework remains selected. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. click Detail Component. double-click it in the Project Browser. for File name.

rfa. use keynote 06160. select the metal fascia with drip edge. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 63mm Rigid Insulation. click Training Files. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 6 Click Modify.D11. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Click to place the leader arm. and click OK. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. (Element Properties). In the Keynotes dialog. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. click Edit/New.C1. 19mm Plywood. 2 In the alert dialog. Roof Edge4. use keynote 07645. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.B5. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. For the metal coping. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.

D11. use keynote 06160.9 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Type Selector.A8. 12 On the Design Bar. use keynote 06110. click Detail Component. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. using keynote 07460. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. FasciaProfile_1.F1. 17 Keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and click . For the 50 x 300. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 11 Click OK 3 times. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. use keynote 06110. You do this in order to keynote the component. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar.I1. For the 50 x 200. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. For the 50 x 150. select Corrugated Metal.20 Ga. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 18 Save the file. navigate to 07645. use keynote 09250. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .D1. click in the Value column.G1.F1. click Keynote ➤ Element. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. 22mm Corrugated Steel . for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.

12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Save. 19 In the Name dialog. 5 In the drawing area. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select the left end point of the reference line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. 20 Click OK 3 times. click Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. and click (Element Properties).Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Load into Projects. click Training Files.rvt. select Medium Lines. 24 While pressing CTRL. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. click Edit/New. 16 Select the component. select Medium Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. 6 Lock the line. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Open. 11 Press DELETE. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. click Lines. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Duplicate.rft. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . for File name. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. click Detail Component. click Training Files. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 13 In the Type Selector. and click Open.

click in the Value column. and click .25 Next. 29 In the drawing area. 37 Click OK 3 times. invisible. against the 19mm plywood.G1. 38 On the Design Bar. 47 Select the component.A1. 34 In the Name dialog. 28 In the Type Selector. and click . click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the lower end at the break line. 31 Select the component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 40 Click Modify. and assign it keynote 07260. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. 46 Click Modify. click Detail Component.A5. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 49 With the component selected. You add the components to the project and keynote them. and click . 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 44 On the Design Bar. and hidden) used in the view. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. select m_Light Line Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. 30 Click Modify. click Edit/New. on the Edit toolbar. and click OK. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. enter EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 06110. 42 Using the same method used previously. 41 Select the component just added. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . 48 Using the same method used previously. click (Move). 43 Zoom to the repeating component. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing.

Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . select Chain. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 55 Click Modify. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . click Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

67 In the Type Selector. select the component. 63 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. and assign it keynote 07260.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 61 In the drawing area. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component.A4. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Load into Projects. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 50 x 200 Framing. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.rfa. select Invisible Lines. and Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Air Barrier. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. name the component Vapor Barrier. click Detail Component. in the Type Selector.58 Using the method used previously.

2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. Enter 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and assign it keynote 07210. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. under Keynote Table. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. add a keynote for the component. and press TAB. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. 3 In the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 72 Save the file..A9. and press TAB.A1.txt. click Browse. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The database file opens in a text editor. Enter 07463. 70 Using the method used previously. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click File menu ➤ Save. and close the text editor. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. name the component Batt Insul. and click . and press ENTER.69 Select the component.A4. 71 In the drawing area.

9 In the drawing area. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. After you create a drafting view. click to place the leader. navigate to 07463. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. you learn how to create a drafted detail. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click OK. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1.txt. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 13 Click Modify. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select all the keynotes. and click OK. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 14 Save the file. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. In the Type Selector. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. select Absolute. 11 Click Modify.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click to place the note. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. and click Open. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. under Path Type. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson.

4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Colors. verify that Auto .Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. select 1 : 5. for Scale. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click OK. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. The detail is imported as an import symbol.Center to Center is selected. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the Rename View dialog. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321.dwg. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. and click Rename. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. For Positioning. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select Black and White.rvt. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). right-click Drafting 1. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. click Training Files. Click Open.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and use the callout grips to move the callout head. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. enter Detail . 5 Click Modify. click Edit/New. and click Properties. and click OK. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. delete the existing value. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 10 In the Rename dialog. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. select Reference other view. for New. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. click Callout. 6 Select the callout.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. 3 On the Options Bar.No Reference.

The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays./Det. The callout is updated with the sheet information. and double-click the callout. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.Elev. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 .No Reference). double-click A105 . 18 Save the file. click Modify./Sect.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.

and click OK. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 14 Click OK 3 times. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Detail Component. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Gyp. Board. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. for Name. click Region Properties. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. enter Header @ Sliding Door. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. . 12 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 3 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 11 In the Name dialog.

Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). select Wide Lines. (Mirror). click . 20 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 18 While pressing CTRL.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the width dimension.5mm. 17 Click Modify. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. and enter 20.

29 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. for Name.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Move the cursor up. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Edit/New. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.Finish. click Filled Region. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. select Wood . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Finish. 30 In the Name dialog. . 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 24 Select the mirrored region. click Region Properties. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click . click Filled Region. 40 On the Options Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. in the Type Selector.5mm. 38 On the Design Bar. click (Align). Draw a rectangle as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. verify that the thickness is 19mm. click Finish Sketch. 39 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. and select the right edge of the wood region.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. click (Rectangle). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. sketch the new region as shown.

click 48 Click Modify. click Ref Plane. and press ENTER. (Align). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. enter 10mm. 47 Click the reference plane.42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. click Finish Sketch. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter 6mm. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. and press ENTER. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

Select Chain. and select the bottom horizontal line. click (Trim/Extend).52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 56 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and click to select the point. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm. Move the cursor down 305mm. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left 25mm. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line.

68 Click Modify. select Medium Lines. 62 Select the left detail line. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. 63 Repeat for the right detail line.2mm.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. For Offset.rfa. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click Training Files. 61 Click Modify. click Detail Component. and click Open. 69 Select the bolt. enter 3mm. top. click Load. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 65 On the Options Bar. select the height dimension. enter 76. click Detail Lines. 58 In the Type Selector. 60 Select the left.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . use the images as a guide. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. select Wide Lines. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.rfa. 76 In the Type Selector. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. click Load.70 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt. and click Open.

79 In the Type Selector. click . 80 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle.78 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. select Thin Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 84 On the Design Bar. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click . click Detail Lines. (Mirror). 87 Click Modify.

and on the Edit toolbar. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . click Detail Lines.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. as shown. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click (Mirror). 89 On the Design Bar. 90 In the Type Selector. 92 Select the line. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left.

and click to place the arc as shown. 101 On the Design Bar. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select the length dimension.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and press ENTER. 99 Click Modify. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. select M_Break Line. enter 3mm. 95 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. click Detail Lines. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. 97 On the Options Bar. 102 In the Type Selector. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click .

110 Select the dimension line. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. using the Drag Text grip. 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.5mm Arial. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 105 In the drawing area. click Dimension. and click Modify. 107 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 .

119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. under Dimension Value. and enter Varies. and then click the dimension text.5mmArial. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 113 Under Text Fields. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear .Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. under Dimension Value. and click the dimension text.2. select Replace With Text. click Dimension. enter See Schedule. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. 114 Click OK. 118 Select Modify to end the command. select Replace With Text. for Below.

and on the Options Bar. and click Modify. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 125 In the Options Bar. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 128 Select the note. click Text. 126 In the drawing area. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 123 Click OK. 127 Enter Gyp. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and click to place the text. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . click to create an arced leader. select the gypsum board region on the left. Board.121 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B.

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file.131 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command.

you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise.rvt. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click East. 339 . including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

click Modify.Hexagon. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 Select the keynote.rfa.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 7 On the Design Bar. click Symbol. 5 On the Options Bar. type 1. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.

under Identity Data. 12 On the Edit toolbar. for Text. click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 341 .9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click OK. on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). and click above the tag to place the copy.

14 With the copy selected. 18 Using the same method. click Copy. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 17 Click OK. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click. 19 With the tag selected. type Repair existing door surround. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 16 For Tag. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. (Mirror). 15 For Text. on the Edit toolbar. type B.

Repair existing door surround. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean exterior brick wall. Remove all existing windows. 22 Optionally. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. and moving counter-clockwise. click Modify. Repair as required. using the table as a reference. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required.

Clean cut and repair wall as required. select Exterior Construction Notes. and for Alignment. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. for Header text. 28 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). for Heading. and click OK. format. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Tag. and click Add. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Exterior Construction Notes. select Tag. and select Bold. select Center. On the Appearance tab. and click Add. Create.Elevations. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Select Text. 26 Click OK. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. On the Formatting tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type Description. and drag it to the sheet. type Mark. for the value. for Sort by. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. type 6 mm. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and double-click A103 . expand Schedules/Quantities. 29 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. 27 In the column header (text).Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. for Note block name. verify that Arial is selected.

Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. double-click T .31 On the Design Bar. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.rvt. under Sheets (all). Using Drawing Lists | 345 .rvt.Title Sheet.

under Sheets (all). ■ 4 Click OK. Select Sheet Name. and click Add. in the second field. double-click T . The drawing list displays. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Filter by. 5 In the list title field. and click Add. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. in the first field. 7 In the Project Browser. select Sheet Number. and in the third field. type T. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. for Sort by. 6 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select Sheet Index. expand Schedules/Quantities. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. On the Filter tab. under Available fields. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Title Sheet. select Sheet Number.

Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. For the text. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. click Modify. windows. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties.9 On the Design Bar. and so on). doors. and door frames. 11 Save the file. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Finally. Training File Using Legends | 347 . Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. door frame schedule. On construction documents. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them.

for Name. 9 For Text Font. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. type 3mm. type Legend Text. click Text. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Symbol. 10 For Text Size. for Name. click Edit/New. click . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. and click OK twice. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. click Duplicate.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar.Open Level Head . 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. select Arial.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . type Typical Symbol Legend. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and click OK.

type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. expand Legends.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and for Leader. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. and click to place it. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click A101 . verify that is selected. 14 Working from the top down. expand Sheets (all).Site Plan/Floor Plan.

20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. and click to place it. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 23 Save the file. double-click A102 . click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. under Sheets. 22 On the Design Bar. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Viewport : No Titlemark.17 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Unit 18. select Viewport : No Titlemark.

you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. For Host length. For View. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. type 900 mm. click Legend Component. select Medium for Detail Level. select 1 : 50. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Section. 3 For Scale. type 4th Floor Wall Types. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

for Leader. click Text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. for Family. 12 In the Type Selector. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click to add text without a leader. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall. and on the Options Bar. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.

19 Type the following text. 23 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. and click New Sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. right-click Sheets (all). Creating a Component Legend | 353 . The text note with leader is added to the legend.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader. under Floor Plans. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.

28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Legends. click Modify to end the command. double-click Level 4. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.25 In the Project Browser. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. drag it onto the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select 4th Floor Wall Types. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. The open drawings are both visible. 29 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Component Legend | 355 . click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. 34 Select the patio divider wall. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. select Detail Level: Medium. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 35 On the View Control Bar.

These changes can be due to owner requests. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. or changes in building material availability. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed.rvt. click 37 Save the file. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. contractor inquiries. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . unanticipated changes in construction conditions. double-click Level 4. You can create a sequence of revisions. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.36 Optionally. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Using the table. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. If Visible is not selected. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 5 For Description. If you select Per Sheet. When you use this option. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . for Numbering. the revision is locked and issued to the field. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When Issued is selected. In general. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. For example. verify that Per Project is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. In most instances. type a date. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. yet as concise as possible. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. 7 Under Show.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4.8 Click OK. click (Move). 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 4 On the Edit toolbar.rvt. 3 Select the divider. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 On the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. move the cursor up. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 5 Select the divider. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. under Floor Plans. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. including revision number and revision date. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 9 Save the file. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. Revision clouds have read-only properties. you make changes to the project floor plan. click Modify. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.

Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . and click OK. 8 In the drawing area. click Finish Sketch. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Revision Cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. select Snaps Off. click near the partition you moved. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. In the Snaps dialog.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.

for Line Weight. 16 Click OK. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click the Annotation Objects tab. select 6. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. you load a revision tag into the project. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.

7 In the left pane of the dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag.rvt. You then issue a revision. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 11 Click to place the tag. select Leader. double-click Level 4. you need to add one. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 12 Save the file. 4 On the Options Bar. 10 In the drawing area. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. the cloud is tagged as number 1.rfa. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . and because the revision is the first in the project. click Training Files. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because you chose to number by project. 5 In the Tags dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 6 Click Load. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. click Tags. 8 In the Tags dialog. click OK.

with the description Relocate Door. and enter a date. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. NOTE After you issue a revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. click Add. and enter a date for the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. under Sheets. and click OK. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. double-click A107 . You can continue to add revisions. You do this by issuing the revision. 8 Add another revision row. 7 For Description. select Issued. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. type Modify Paving Area.Unnamed. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. you can no longer modify it. you prevent further changes to the revision.rvt. 9 Click OK.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 11 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 12 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Working with Revisions | 363 . double-click A107 . 15 On the Options Bar. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Seq.Unnamed. 2 . 20 On the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. 17 Using the same method learned previously. select the revision cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Modify Paving Area. click to add a revision clouds. 19 To add tags. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. in the drawing area. select Revision Cloud. apply Seq. for Revision. 3 . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select Tag ➤ By Category.

for Numbering. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. select the titleblock. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Click Options. For each revision. you edit the titleblock family. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. clear Issued. delete the first 3 characters. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Alphabetic. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. beginning with "D". for Sequence. 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. height. and rotation) to the revision schedule.

30 In the Element Properties dialog. Clear Blank row before data. Working with Revisions | 365 . 28 In the alert dialog. and click Properties. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. for Build Schedule. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and press DELETE. click Yes.27 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Edit. click Yes. Select Grid lines. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. right-click Revision Schedule. Select Outline. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. for Appearance. click Load into Projects. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. under Other. select Bottom-up. and drag it above the schedule area. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Modify. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the schedule header. 35 Select the existing schedule lines.

Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. select the revision schedule. right-click Revision Schedule. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .. and on the Options Bar. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select 90° Counterclockwise. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. 40 Select the revision schedule header. enter Rev. 45 On the Appearance tab. for Heading. for Height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. open the titleblock family for editing. for Formatting. and click Properties. When the height property is variable. under Other. for Rotation on Sheet. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. With a user-defined height. the schedule is restricted to a specific size.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. select User defined. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. click Edit.

and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Yes. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 50 In the Reload Family dialog. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. text. click Load into Projects.

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. click Text.Title Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Leader.Title Sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. under Sheets. double-click T . 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click to add text without a leader. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click T . click Training Files. and place it on a sheet.

6 Select the text. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.doc text file in another window. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. with the new text box still selected. 11 Save the file. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. click Modify.

click Modify. and open Common\Fixture Schedule.mdi. 12 Save the file. for Name. under Sheets. and click Save.xls. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. This step has been completed for you. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 10 On the Design Bar. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.JPG. click Training Files. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click File menu ➤ Print. 5 Click OK. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format.Unit 18. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This process may vary from system to system. 4 Under Printer. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type Fixture Schedule. double-click A102 . 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. select the document writer. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. for File name.rvt. click Desktop. and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. 371 . as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. called dependent views. you break up the plan into sections. To effectively document this project.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser.Aviary. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. double-click Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. enter Level 2 . for Name. select the crop region. The dependent view opens. right-click Level 2. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 5 Click in the drawing area. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Level 2.10 Click in the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click OK. and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.Labs. and on the Zoom flyout. 15 Select the crop region. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . enter Level 2 . 13 In the Rename View dialog. for Name.

and on the Zoom flyout. 20 Click in the drawing area. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. click Modify. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click (Hide Crop Region). click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Matchline. 19 On the View Control Bar. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 .The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar.

and click.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Click above the left corner of the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .Aviary. expand Sheets. for Line Weight. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 28 For Line Pattern. select Double Dash. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. under Floor Plans. enter Level 2 Aviary. click Level 2 . 27 Under Matchline. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click Rename. select 9. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. for Name. and click OK. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. and drag it onto the sheet. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. right-click A101 .

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser.Labs dependent view on the sheet. and place the Level 2 . under Floor Plans. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. for Target view.Aviary is selected. 39 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. click View Reference. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.35 On the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify.

NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. for Target view. 45 On the Zoom flyout.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 41 On the Options Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs. 44 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit.

select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. double-click Level 2 . under Floor Plans. 49 If. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click (Show Crop Region). 48 Select the crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.46 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . after modifying the annotation crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. right-click. click the far right control.

53 In the Select Views dialog.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 54 In the Project Browser. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. but are not placed on sheets. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. click Zoom To Fit. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . select all views in the list. under Floor Plans. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. right-click Level 2. 51 On the View Control Bar. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click Apply Dependent Views. expand Level 1. 52 In the Project Browser. and click OK. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1.

you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. click Training Files. click Zoom To Fit. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views.57 On the Zoom flyout.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view. and double-click South Elevation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and click Rename. and drag it toward the center of the view. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.Right. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser.Left. and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . cropping the view to the lab building. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click South Elevation. 5 In the drawing area. and click Rename. expand South Elevation. for Name. select the Crop Region. 11 Select the crop region. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. enter South Elevation . 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.The dependent view opens. enter South Elevation . and click OK. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 7 On the View Control Bar.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 .15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. click Camera. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. The perspective view displays.

4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. With the camera shown. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. under Floor Plans. right-click 3D View 1. double-click Site. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. and click Show Camera. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as shown. If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement. as necessary.3 Zoom out. and select the crop boundary. and adjust the field of vision. in the Project Browser. the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

under 3D Views. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .6 In the Project Browser.Day. 10 Save the file. and click Rename. double-click Exterior . 7 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. enter Exterior . and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. and click OK. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day to open the view. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 8 In the Project Browser.

You then duplicate the view. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. modify render settings. and render a daytime view of the exterior.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Day. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior . and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.rvt. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .

For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. for New. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE If a background image is required. select Medium. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. 3pm. for Setting. for Sun. In this case. 8 Under Quality. You create a location and time for the rendering. and click Rename. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. You adjust cloud settings as required. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. 5 In the Rename dialog.Santa Monica. under Lighting. 6 Click OK twice.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. select Spring Equinox. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit/New. enter Spring Equinox . and click Render. under Background.

click Show the model. click Export. 10 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. Click Save. For Files of type.9 In the Rendering dialog. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 13 Close the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog.png). select Portable Network Graphics (*. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Desktop. click Show the rendering.

120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Lighting. for Scheme. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. and click Artificial Lights. 27 In the Rendering dialog. enter Pool House Lights.Flat Round : 60W . click OK. for Name. click New.Night view open. right-click Exterior . click Render. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list.Exterior . 24 In the New Light Group dialog. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . and select the last light.Night. for Name. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. under Group Options. 16 With the Exterior .Night. add 30 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under 3D Views. dialog. and click OK.Day view to Exterior . select Exterior: Artificial only. press and hold SHIFT. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. enter Pool Lights. and click OK. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click Dialog). verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V through 35 :Sconce Light .120V to the Pool Lights group. click New. on the View Control Bar. you duplicate the view and change the settings.120V.Day. and click Move to Group. 22 Using the same method. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . select the first light. under Group Options. and click OK. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 25 Using the same method. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.

Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 31 Close the Rendering dialog. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. under Image. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and click OK. for Exposure Value. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. After the image is rendered. In this example. enter 4. click Show the model. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. 32 Save the file. you change the brightness of the exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog.

rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. render the views. and finally.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Exact placement is not important. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. click Modify. and place the component inside the pool house. click Component. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Select the figure. the person’s line of sight.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. select RPC Female : YinYin. double-click Level 1. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans. Adding RPC People | 413 .

11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Edit. select Cast Reflections. click Modify. you can enable this option.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. under Identity Data. click (Element Properties). 14 Save the file. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Render Appearance Properties. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. In order to see the figure’s reflection. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. By default. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. under Parameters. 12 Click OK 3 times.

Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.rvt. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . click Camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera.

under Extents. under 3D Views. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. select Section Box.The perspective view displays. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties.

in addition to the 3D view. In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click South.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 9 In the Project Browser. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . select the section box. under Floor Plans.

size the box as shown.12 In the floor plan view. size the box as shown. 13 In the South Elevation view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 14 In the 3D view. right-click. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box.

To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. doors that contain windows or glass.15 Maximize the 3D view. and render the interior view. and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall.

3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Click Artificial Lights. You can specify a lower quality. 8 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. click Render. select Draft. under 3D Views.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter Interior . click (Show Rendering Dialog).Night. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Lighting. 4 In the Rendering dialog. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. and click OK. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Interior: Artificial only. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and click OK. and click Rename. for Setting. right-click 3D View 1. After these settings are established. 7 Under Quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. for Scheme. you turn them off for this scene. clear Pool Lights. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 2 In the Rename View dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level.

click Copy To Custom. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . select Spring Equinox . In this case.Night. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. 17 In the Rendering dialog. By default they are turned off. For sunlit interiors. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. (Show Rendering Dialog). select Region. but the space will receive standard daylighting. and click OK. select Curtain Walls. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click 14 For Setting. in order to turn on daylight portals. for Daylight Portal Options. you must create a custom setting. For more information on daylight portals. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog.9 Close the Rendering dialog. the daylight portals can be turned on.Santa Monica. 3pm. 13 In the Rendering dialog. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Interior: Sun only. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Sun. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. You create a view for the interior during the day. The preset schemes are read-only. select Edit. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . and click Render. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. for Scheme.Day. right-click Interior . NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view.

click Properties). enter 10. under Image. select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. enter 1. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. In the next steps. Click OK. 20 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect.18 In the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Show the model. For Saturation. and close the Rendering dialog.

select Unfinished. select Printer. click OK. 30 In the drawing area. select Based on wood grain. and click OK. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. enter 90. For Amount. and click Render. click (Show Rendering Dialog). you can define the output and quality settings for final output. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 29 In the Rendering dialog. click the dimensions for Size. under Output Settings. You change the varnish setting.6. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. Click OK. 23 With the column still selected. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. As size and DPI are increased. For Width. select the crop boundary. select Scale (locked proportions). add a bump map to create texture. select Wood. and on the Options Bar. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter 5''. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select High. For Bump. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. for Resolution. clear Region. For Rotate.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Materials dialog. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. the render time increases significantly. for Setting.

you rendered an exterior and an interior view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. In a plan view. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. or section view.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. independent of the Revit Architecture software. Usually. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also define it in a 3D. elevation. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.

proceeds through the dining room. and ends in the far corner of the living room.rvt. verify that Perspective is selected. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. click Walkthrough. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and open Common\c_Townhouse. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and double-click 1st Floor.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . expand Floor Plans. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the tab in the context menu. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. click Training Files. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. and change unit formats as desired.

Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. click Finish. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 17 Click . and click OK. enter 16''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 12 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. and for Height. select the crop boundary. for Width. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Frame. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. click the dimensions for Size. and select the crop boundary.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 1. click Edit Walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. on the Options Bar. enter 9''. 14 Click . If it is not. verify that Field of view is selected. 11 Under Change. and click OK.

Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and click OK. double-click 1st Floor. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. c_Townhouse. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. press ESC. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Extents. clear Far Clip Active. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.rvt. click (Element Properties). 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough.The walkthrough plays. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.

and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. and drag it to the location shown.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 7 Click the third key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. for Controls. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path. 6 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. for Frames/sec. If you are unsure of what option to use. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. c_Townhouse. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. and click OK. enter 15. double-click Walkthrough 1. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. for Compressor. specifying the number of frames. under Walkthroughs. shading. The walkthrough is recorded. under Output Length. . without opening Revit Architecture 2009. reducing the size of the image.rvt. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. hidden line. click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. shading with edges. select <Shading>. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and click Save. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 8 If you want to save this exercise. or rendering. When you export the walkthrough. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 To play the walkthrough.

A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. More specifically. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. In this tutorial. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. 431 .Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs.

3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. expand Views (all).rvt. click Camera. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating a Solar Study . 1 In the Project Browser. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. expand Floor Plans. A 3D view is created. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. and double-click 01 Entry. as shown.Courtyard View In this exercise. 4 On the View toolbar. click shown. click Training Files. (SteeringWheels).

click Section.5 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry. and click Rename. you create a section cutaway view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. right-click 3D View 1. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. as shown.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. click Save As. enter Solar Study . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house.Courtyard View. 9 On the File menu. if necessary. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 3 On the Design Bar.

8 In the Rename View dialog. click . 6 To view the section. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. click Modify. double-click the section head. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). and click Rename. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. click Modify. click 10 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the SteeringWheel.

rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. and click OK. click Callout.14 In the Project Browser. 17 To hide the section box. under Floor Plans. 18 On the File menu. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click {3D}. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. under Floor Plans. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. then Fine. you create a plan cutaway view. and click Rename. then select Medium. click Save. including the house. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 16 On the View Control Bar. clear Section Boxes. do not display many elements in 3D. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 4 In the Project Browser. Typical plan views. double-click 01 Entry. and click OK. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 15 In the Rename View dialog. In some cases. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 5 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. click . under 3D Views. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 In the Rename View dialog. as shown.

so you can see into the building from the top. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. as shown. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. click Modify. 15 Select the Roof. 11 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (SteeringWheels).8 On the View toolbar. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.

Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. under 3D Views. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 21 On the File menu.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.17 On the View Control Bar. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 19 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. click Save.

For this study. and time.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. date.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. expand Views (all). MA. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. and time range. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . USA.Boston. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Los Angeles. and click Duplicate. or multi-day solar study. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. CA. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . click click OK. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. enter Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . You can create a still. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. . For the Single-Day solar study. and click OK. 4 For Sun Position. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. click . single-day. 10 Under Place. Los Angeles. For the Multi-Day solar study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. expand 3D Views. you specify the location. for City. 3 Select Cast Shadows. USA is selected.Creating Solar Studies . 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. date range. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. you specify the location. leave the slider at 50. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 9 In the Name dialog. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. Click the Single-Day tab.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . Clear Ground Plane at Level. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click Save. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK. 2008. For Time Range. select Winter Solstice. and click OK. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. and click OK. 6 On the View Control Bar. on the Single-Day tab. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. select June 22. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Los Angeles.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 19 On the File menu. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. click . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter 10 and press ENTER.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select December 22. under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. for Sun Position. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. enter Winter Solstice. Under Frame. 7 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Name dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 14 In this case. enter 20 and press ENTER. ■ For Time Interval. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . Los Angeles. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2008. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. for Date. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Los Angeles is selected. click .

select Summer Solstice. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. double-click 01 Entry. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. approximately as shown. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 13 On the View Control Bar. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. The solar study animation plays. . click . you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click To display the next sequential frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. 14 On the Options Bar. Los Angeles.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. on the Single-Day tab. click Text. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. . under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK.■ To display the next key frame. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. for Sun Position. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

On the Options Bar. 6 On the View Control Bar. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 8 For Sun Position. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click Lines. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. as shown. expand 3D Views. Click and enter Dining. as shown. 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click . click . approximately as shown. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway.

select Frame Range. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. as shown. select Section Boxes. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 15 To hide the section box. 14 Click outside of the section box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. select Summer Solstice. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. 11 To display the section box.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Frames per second. select the section box. verify that the value is set to 15. 12 In the drawing area. and enter 5 to 50. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . clear Section Boxes. on the Single-Day tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Output Length. Los Angeles. and click OK. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. if necessary. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area.

For Dimensions. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. Los Angeles. For Files of Type. or frame. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. for Compressor. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. To view the animation. under Output Length. on the Single-Day tab. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For File Name. and click OK. 3 For Sun Position. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. for Model Graphics Style. and enter 5 to 10. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. To maintain the proportions of the frame. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. select Frame Range.■ ■ Under Format. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Under Format. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click . for Model Graphics Style. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. of the animation separately.Los Angeles. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click OK. select Winter Solstice. select AVI Files. verify that the value is set to 15. you open each image. Click OK. For Frames per second. enter 450 in the first field (width). Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 .

Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. such as JPEG. Click OK. In this example. enter 450 in the first field (width). 8 Click Save. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. select PNG. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click Save. depending on the Frame Range.Los Angeles. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. or any single-frame format. click the Desktop icon.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. or GIF. For Files of Type. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . TIFF. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.■ For Dimensions. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For File name. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. BMP. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .2 Select the section box in the drawing area. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.

specify 2:00 pm. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. USA. and click OK.Boston. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . and click OK.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select One week. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Los Angeles . MA. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. 5 Select the roof. 12 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position. 8 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click Duplicate. click OK. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and on the View Control Bar. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. For Time Interval. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab.Week Interval. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Time. click the Multi-Day tab. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. for File name enter 2pm .

for File Name. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). Click the Desktop icon. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. and click Save.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you mirror all model elements. In the Length/Format dialog. click OK. such as East . Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. and click OK. model views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 17 On the View Control Bar. and annotations in non-drafting views. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog.West or North . for Compressor.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. double-click 01 Entry. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. When you mirror a project. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.South. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. Re-orienting the Project | 447 .

click OK. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. 5 In the warning dialog. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. 2 In the drawing area. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. In this exercise. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.West axis. 6 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views.West. The project is mirrored along the East . select East . select the roof. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For additional information. Then.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. right-click.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.

click Apply. click . Orienting to True North | 449 . 8 For Sun Position. 10 Under Date and Time. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. click .3 On the View Control Bar. 11 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. and select Winter Solstice. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. 12 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 5 For Sun Position. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. click . to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. on the Still tab. For example. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

and click OK. and click OK. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. right click 01 Entry. 18 In the Project Browser.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). This process establishes the view setting to True North. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. 19 In the Project Browser. the view settings must be set for True North. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Winter Solstice. for Orientation. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 14 On the View Control Bar. click . 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. select True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click 01 Entry. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 15 For Sun Position. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. and click Properties. under Floor Plans. click the Still tab. When a project is started. click OK. click OK.

click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. as shown. Orienting to True North | 451 . The floor plan rotates in the view.■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.

View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. and click OK. under 3D Views. for Orientation. click . Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 28 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click 01 Entry. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties.23 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 In the Rename View dialog. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Orientation. enter True North Orientation. click the Still tab. right-click. 32 On the View Control Bar. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. and click Element Properties. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. select True North Orientation. select Summer Solstice. 33 For Sun Position. and click OK. select Project North. right-click. select True North.

click Summer Solstice. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. For Files of Type. click the Single-Day tab. Orienting to True North | 453 . and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Compressor. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. enter 600 in the first field. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. click OK. Click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. under Format. for Dimensions. verify that AVI Files is selected. Click Save. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. For File Name. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.

■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. Rendered views do not have this limitation. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select 12/22. Under Lighting. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. under 3D Views. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Setting. select Interior: Sun only. for Scheme. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For Sun. select Edit/New. and click Duplicate. and exporting it as a JPEG image. (Show Rendering Dialog).Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Winter Solstice. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. 1 In the Project Browser. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. In this exercise. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. In the Name dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Render. under Settings. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. 2 In the Project Browser. and 2:00 PM. capturing it. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click OK. for Date and Time. select Medium.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under Quality. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 3 On the View Control Bar. Since a rendered image is temporary. under 3D Views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use.

so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. and click Save. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. enter living area_winter solstice. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog.6 In the Rendering dialog. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. click Save to Project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Files of type. verify that JPEG Files is selected. click Desktop. click Export. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . NOTE Rendered views are temporary. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. and click OK.

456 .

Other tools in the software. For the realistic approach. 457 . linework. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. a consultant. you can choose between realism and stylistics. you explore the stylistic approach. In this series of exercises. Co-house. type. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and details. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. When organizing presentation graphics. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. In this tutorial. length. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. or the client. however. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. advanced model graphics. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. an outside reviewer. Using the pre-built building model.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and section boxes. sections. elevations. They include rendering.

you create a presentation floor plan.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. In the left pane of the Open dialog. exit the menu. under Floor Plans. click in the drawing area. and click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. click Training Files. right-click 2nd Flr.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst. Cnst. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan.

This turns off the visibility of all tags. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. click the Annotation Categories tab. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 7 Under Visibility. and Up Arrow. this represents the view getting smaller. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 11 In the Save As directory. elevations. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Scale control and select 1:100.rvt. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . navigate to the folder of your choice. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 8 Click OK. and click Save. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Down Arrow. dimensions. sections. expand the Stairs category. No annotations display in the view. and other annotations in this view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and clear DOWN Text. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. UP Text.

2 On the View Control Bar. modify. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. you can create. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 For Place. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. select Boston.rvt. double-click it in the Project Browser. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . specify 35. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Sun Position. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. MA. for Date and Time. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. on the Still tab. select By Date. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 6 Under Settings. click OK. NOTE For this step. you can select any city.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . and select 1st Flr. At that place. The higher the number. 9 For City. click (Shadows Off). The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. select Sun and Shadow Settings. Time and Place. If you select a different city. Within a project. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. specify 10/27. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. however. the darker the shadows. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . Cnst. and click OK. 1:00 PM. click the Place tab. ■ For Contrast. 12 Click OK. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. clear Ground Plane at Level. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Settings. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. for Sun Position. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. click OK. click (Shadows On). .

3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click View. and click to place it. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 4 In the Views dialog. click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click Add View to Sheet. click Sheet. and notice the view title.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. The viewport displays at the cursor. and click OK. select Arch Portrait. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 .

13 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. and click Activate View. select No. for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title. and click OK. click Duplicate. click . you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. For this analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. To accomplish this. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. and click OK.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 9 On the Options Bar.

18 On the Options Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. and the boundary of the region. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. When you finish drawing the chain. If necessary. click Edit/New. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click Filled Region. select Invisible lines.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and select Chain. click . Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . click Region Properties. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 22 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. fill properties. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

enter Presentation. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. for Sheet Name. scroll down. click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click . and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. enter Solid Black. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 30 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. and click OK.24 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Name. and click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Graphics.

A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. right-click South.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .

Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click in the drawing area. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Settings. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and click OK. 13 For Contrast. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Time and Place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 11 On the View Control Bar. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Visibility. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Duplicate. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. select By Date. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click . select Cast Shadows. By changing the angle of the sun. right-click Copy of South. 12 Under Shadow. exit the menu. clear Visible. on the Model Categories tab. 16 In the Name dialog. under Elevations. scroll up. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. specify 2:30 PM. and click Rename. click Override. 14 For Sun Position. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and clear Elevation Swing.2 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. expand the Doors category. 9 Click OK. click (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 18 For Time. click in the Walls row. specify 35. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility.

4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt.Presentation. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Add View. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation.

click Modify. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 1: 100. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. double-click 1st Flr. 3 On the Options Bar. for Scale. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Cnst. click Section. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. 4 Add the section shown below. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. under Floor Plans.

To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. 7 On the Options Bar. this view needs to be rotated 180°. as shown. click Callout.Section 2 is added to the building model. expand Sections (Callout 1). Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. select 1 : 100. and double-click Section 2. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique.

scroll up. 12 In the Project Browser. clear Visible. click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. enter Presentation Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. click in the Walls row. and click OK. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Override. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. under Pattern Overrides. 11 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. 15 Under Visibility. expand the Doors category. 10 In the Project Browser. and clear Elevation Swing. 17 Under Visibility. right-click Callout of Section 2. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1).

■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. click The crop regions no longer display. 22 On the View Control Bar. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. When you select the crop region. (Hide Crop Region). and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 20 Click OK. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 .

The shadows do not offer much contrast. select Cast Shadows. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Contrast. In addition. double-click Presentation Section 2. in the Project Browser. specify the following: Under Shadow. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. In the steps that follow. 2 On the View Control Bar. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. ■ For Sun Position. Click Apply. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 In the Name dialog. specify 35. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Duplicate. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. select Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. specify 135°. Click OK. Silhouette Edges. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. was added to this training file for training purposes. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Shadows On). For Azimuth. specify 70°. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Altitude. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Select Relative to View. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. select Directly. and click OK. for Silhouette style. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. NOTE The line style.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. select Section: Presentation Section 2.Presentation.rvt. and click to place the selected view. and click Add View to Sheet. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Add View. 3 In the Views dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

To rotate an object. click (Rotate). under Sections (Callout 1). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. and press Enter. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. The section needs to be rotated 180°.5 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Using a clock as a reference. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. In the steps that follow. select Viewport : Presentation. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. you click to specify the start radius. The view title no longer displays.

Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 .

Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. After applying the view template to a new section view. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 On the Design Bar. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

double-click Presentation Section 2. you can simply apply the presentation view template. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. under Sections (Type 1).rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 4 In the View Templates dialog. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. enter Presentation. click OK. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

and elevation swings no longer display. annotations.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Deactivate View. for Rotation on Sheet. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select 90° Counterclockwise. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . lighting fixtures. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . and click OK. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. under Names. 12 In the Views dialog. under Graphics. under Sheets (all). 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click OK. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. The furniture. 18 Right-click the viewport. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 15 Right-click the viewport.

21 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. In this exercise. traditional analytiques contain a detail.

4 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Section 1. select the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). as shown. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . under Sections (Type 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. and click Rename. click Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. After you add the callout.

and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. under Extents. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click View Properties. as shown. clear Annotation Crop. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 8 Right-click. 6 In the Project Browser.5 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 7 Select the crop region.

under Sheets (all). specify 22. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . select Custom. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. 12 In the Views dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Add View. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.Presentation. Click OK. click Modify. double-click A105 . Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Viewport : Presentation. For Scale Value 1. and click Activate View. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.

NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. click Region Properties. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. When finished.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. click Edit/New. In the steps that follow. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. activate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). and move it to the position shown below. 23 On the Design Bar. double-click Presentation Callout. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. and make adjustments as necessary. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. click Filled Region.

sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 .Presentation. double-click A105 . click . on the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). select Solid fill. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click Activate View. click Finish Sketch. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. and click OK 3 times. 28 In the Project Browser. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms.25 In the Type Properties dialog. click Filled Region. When you are finished. for Fill Pattern.

click (Show Crop Region). 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .31 On the Options Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 32 On the Design Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click . and sketch the rectangle shown below. 34 Select the crop region. click Finish Sketch.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. and click Deactivate View. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.35 On the View Control Bar.

click the Scale control. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Isometric. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply shadows to the views. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. under 3D Views. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.

and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For Contrast. Click OK. in the list. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Name dialog. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . click . select Cast Shadows. Cnst. specify 45°. click Duplicate. select Section Box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Extents. For Azimuth. 13 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. right-click Isometric. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. specify 135°. right-click Isometric 1. enter Isometric 1. A section box displays around the building model. specify 35. and click OK. Select Ground Plane at Level. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Isometric 2. for Silhouette style. and click OK. select Directly. Select Relative to View.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Select 1st Flr. and click Rename. 15 In the Rename View dialog. For Altitude. and click Rename.

TIP Notice the rotation symbol. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. as shown.19 Select the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. When you are finished.

On the Annotation Categories tab. 25 To hide the section box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). clear Section Boxes. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. When you are finished. you can adjust the plane location. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under 3D Views. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. If desired. double-click A105 . 29 To hide the section box. and click Rename. 23 In the Rename View dialog. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. The section box no longer displays. clear Section Boxes. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. In the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. double-click Isometric 3. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 22 In the Project Browser.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . the stairs and railings may display. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. Next. enter Isometric 3. 27 Select the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Presentation.

drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 33 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. select Viewport : Presentation. The filled region partially covers the view.

select Concrete. for Fill Patterns. On the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. This will make it easier to draw lines. 39 For Background. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 35 Select the poche filled region. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. click Edit. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . select Transparent. and click Activate View. 42 Using the drawing tools. 40 Click OK twice. click Lines. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 41 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1.

46 Click OK twice.43 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 47 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. select Solid fill. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. click Finish Sketch.

you create the final view for the analytique. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. click Camera. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. The view opens immediately. you add it to the presentation sheet.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. a cutaway perspective view. Cnst. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.

click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 6 On the View Control Bar.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. For Contrast. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. click . specify the following: Under Shadow. for Silhouette style. For Sun Position. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. for Name. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. specify 35. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Grips display on each plane of the section box.

On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. In the Type Selector. you must specify the actual size of the image. enter 165 mm.Presentation. and click OK.14 Select the crop region. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. under Change. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. select Viewport : Presentation. click Size. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click A105 . 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. for Width. under Sheets (all). 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 To hide the section box.

and click OK. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. and click OK. enter Description. click Edit/New. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . specify a text size of 6 mm. click Duplicate. select a font. click . 6 In the Name dialog.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. enter Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. under Text. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Text : Title. select the same font as the title. 10 In the Name dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. click Text. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click it in the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. specify a text size of 40 mm. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. under Text. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector.

15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

Once the model has been imported. curtain walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. that compose the building. 507 .Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. and roofs. such as walls. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. After you import the SketchUp model. you create a small building from the front mass form. you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial.

click OK. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. For Layers. click Training Files. click Browse. select Auto-Detect. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. click OK. select SketchUp Files. Double-click the Common folder.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. For Colors. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Create Mass. 10 In the Name dialog. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. For Files of type. For Import units. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. enter Import SketchUp. select All. 9 In the informational dialog. or select from a list. you create a Revit Architecture project. for File name. visible elements. and click Save. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click the Massing tab.rte. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Click the Sketchup file. and not in the library. select Preserve. buildings. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. under Template file. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.skp. right-click in the Design Bar. enter SketchUp Model. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements.

Center. In a new project. depending on the complexity of the project. Level 1 is the only choice. curtain walls. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . click Finish Mass. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. select Level 1. 16 On the Design Bar. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. For Place at level. and roofs. click the Close button. Click Open. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. 17 In the warning dialog. ■ ■ For Positioning. select Manual . click . 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. such as walls. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. 14 On the View toolbar.

5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and roofs. such as walls. and on the View Control Bar.400mm displays. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. for Level. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Level 2 is selected. select the face so that it highlights in red. After you create the building from the mass faces. verify Basic Roof: Generic . and when the cursor displays a plus sign. 4 On the Options Bar. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. curtain walls. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.18 Proceed to the next exercise. that compose the building. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face.

10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. 6 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. To see the new roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click to display masses. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. A roof is created from the mass face. click Create Roof. on the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected.) to turn off mass visibility in the view.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. 9 On the Options Bar. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.

11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. click Roof by Face.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

200mm displays. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . click Wall by Face. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click Modify to end the command. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click roofs that you created. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. 21 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. for Loc Line. verify Basic Wall: Generic . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 23 On the Options Bar.15 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar.

click Curtain System by Face.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 28 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the left face of the left mass.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. click Create System. 31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

38 Select the mass face shown below. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.35 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. click Create System. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Roof by Face. click Wall by Face. select the other wall. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. and select it.

46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . double-click Level 1. specify a point to place the camera. under Floor Plans. click Camera. Below the right corner of the view. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. and select the mass face shown below.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. click to view the building that you have created. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. 42 On the View toolbar.

48 On the View toolbar. as shown. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. specify a point for the camera target. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. Click the frame to display its grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. to view only the walls. click your building in the view. roofs. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays.

click Modify. click . select Center. select Center. Click OK. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar. for Justification. and select the left curtain system in the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 1 Pattern. for Justification. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 2 Pattern. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view.

54 Select each roof to display its grips. and move the roof edges as shown below. double-click 3D View 1. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . under 3D Views. 59 On the View toolbar. 63 In the Type Selector. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Door. and click Cancel to end the command. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 56 In the Project Browser. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 55 Right-click.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit.rvt. To switch panel types. click Training Files. you create a curtain system using the wall command. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. and you can change these elements individually. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. In the left pane of the Open dialog. to resize the system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. and they are not windows. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. you need to change the length of the wall. Unlike windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and mullions. 525 . This affects the entire curtain system.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. panel. For example. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. or you can use a specific curtain system command. grid lines. you need to select a panel. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. you select the grid. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. To change grids. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Like walls. Like windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click Ground Floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. 8 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 .7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. and room bounding. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. using curtain grids. Click OK. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . enter 1200. For Top Offset. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. top and base attachments.11 Select the curtain system. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. top constraint. and click (Properties). select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF.

right-click Elevation 1 . Creating an Entrance | 529 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid.a. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and click Rename. and click OK. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 25 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Elevation. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.

watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. while pressing CTRL. SIXTH FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. one larger than the other. 33 On the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. click Modify. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. Click to place another grid line. select SECOND FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. THIRD FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. and click OK.26 While pressing CTRL. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

The two segments are removed. click Add or Remove Segments. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. you add a doorway to the curtain system.Next. and on the Options Bar. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then select the segment above it. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed.

select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them.38 Using the same method. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 42 Place dimensions as shown.

47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 43 Delete the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click in any white space to exit the editor.

under Floor Plans. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. . click Training Files. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.Next. not as curtain panels. They are part of the curtain panel category. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. and click Wireframe. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 57 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. click view. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 52 On the Type Selector. under Elevations. 56 In the Project Browser.rfa. Now. These panels schedule as doors. The panel changes to a double door. double-click Entrance Elevation. 54 On the Design Bar. on the new curtain system you added. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 55 In the Project Browser. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line.

64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. The glazed panels display in blue. click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 65 On the View Control Bar. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. and the solid panels display in white. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 63 Click OK twice. 61 With the panel still selected. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Creating an Entrance | 535 . click System Panel : Solid.60 On the Type Selector.

3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.68 On the File menu. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Grid Line Segment. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Entire Grid Line. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. click Mullion. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.

select All Empty Segments. clickModify. 10 Delete the mullions below them. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.6 On the Options Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. so you remove them next. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. because their width reduces the size of the doors. there are a few that you do not want. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions.

and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. click Modify. Finally.Two mullion join controls display. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. you can also right-click. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 16 In the Project Browser. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 14 Click the top mullion control. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 17 Save the file. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.

Click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. enter 1200. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. click Wall. for Top Constraint. 1 In the Project Browser. Finally. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. (Arc passing through three points). 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you add a curtain system using the wall command.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Curved Curtain System | 539 . you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. under Floor Plans. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. For Top Offset.

click Curtain Grid. under Elevations. you place grids on the system. double-click East. You are going to use one of these snaps points.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 14 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. eighths. Divide the halves into quarters. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Next. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.

15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 18 In the Type Selector. you change some panels in the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. click Modify. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.300mm. Next. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . 16 On the Design Bar. select the bottom layer of panels. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the extrusion. 3 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. enter 100. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and click . and click OK. select Glass. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. . 5 On the Design Bar. click . 8 On the Design Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Lines. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 On the Options Bar. clear Chain. 12 On the Options Bar. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Finish Sketch. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. for Depth. click Training Files. click Model Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. double-click FOURTH FLOOR.Pattern. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.Pattern. 21 In the Type Selector. click 25 On the View toolbar.14 On the Design Bar.Pattern. (SteeringWheels). 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 24 On the View toolbar. right-click. and return to the project file. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Curtain Panel . 23 Right-click.rfa. click (Default 3D View). 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 19 In the Project Browser.rfa family. and click Change Walls Orientation. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . click Modify. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. under Floor Plans. All fourth floor panels are selected. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.

All fifth floor panels are selected. 27 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. right-click. select System Panel .The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 Highlight a panel in the arc.Solid. 29 In the Type Selector. All the panels change to the solid panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 30 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Mullion. under Elevations. enter 8. and select it. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click Training Files. click ■ ■ For Sides. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For vertical mullions. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. and click OK. . Select Radius.rft. for Profile Usage. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. double-click East. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click Lines. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Mullion. Click again to specify the ending point. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 8 On the Design Bar.

14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under 3D Views. click Training Files.11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.rfa. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 28 On the View toolbar.detail. 27 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 17 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and return to the project file. and click OK.rfa. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 31 Click . and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 20 Select the detail component. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click Mullion. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. After the new profile is loaded. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click Visibility. click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 19 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 13 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. it can be added as a mullion type. click (SteeringWheels). The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Visibility. double-click Southeast Isometric. clear Fine.rfa family.

42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 38 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . 43 Press DELETE. under Floor Plans. right-click. and click OK. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 33 Click Edit/New. click Modify. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. select All Empty Segments. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 41 In the Project Browser. select Circular Mullion for Family.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 Click OK twice. 36 Under Construction. You have placed more mullions than you want. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. 44 Save the file. for Profile. 40 On the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and you can click to select them all. a storefront system. click Pick Walls. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and a ruled curtain system. 4 On the Design Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. TIP To chain select all the walls. In this lesson. select Defines slope. 5 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and then apply those custom elements to the system. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . under Floor Plans. make custom curtain panels and mullions. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Entire Grid Line.7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 Save the file. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. enter 600. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 12 Zoom in to the skylight. click Modify. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Roof Properties. click Mullion. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. under 3D Views. 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Finish Roof. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 17 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level.

You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Unconnected for Height. and enter 2400. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 1 In the Project Browser. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.Storefront System In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. click Wall. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

double-click Southeast Isometric. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 8 Click the temporary dimension. For this wall. even if the wall height changes. which is specified in the type. Storefront System | 551 . The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. click Edit/New. This specifies an exact length for the wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. and press ENTER. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and click . 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. enter 10200 mm. 10 In the Project Browser. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. under 3D Views. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm.

you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. double-click Southeast Isometric. In this exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Angle. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. or end. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. click Mullion. 19 Select a curtain grid. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. 16 Click OK. 18 On the Options Bar. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . see the Revit Architecture help. Justification. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. center. By setting the Angle value. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 20 Save the file. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 1 In the Project Browser. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 15. under 3D Views. you find Number.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. and Offset.

3 On the View Control Bar. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 6 Click the highlighted line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and highlight the model line.

and click . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. Next. 10 Select the panel. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.8 Select the highlighted line. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created.

In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and define a ruled curtain system. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 18 Save the file. Finally. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. embed a curtain system inside another wall. select System Panel : Solid.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 16 In the Type Selector. and then eighths. and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. right-click.

556 .

shed. 557 . mansard. In this tutorial. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009.Roofs 15 In this lesson. You do not need to create the work plane. In this exercise. you learn to create several different types of roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. gutters. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In this lesson. gable. Before you can sketch the roof profile. including hip. and low sloped roofs. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In addition. you learn how to add fascia.rvt. click Training Files. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. and double-click Level 1. centerline. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. select Name. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 4 Click OK. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 5 In the Go To View dialog. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . verify that Section: Section1 is selected. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click the blue square on the witness line. click Ref Plane.1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and so on).

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. sketch the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the Options Bar.Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.

The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and double-click Section 1. 18 Select the edge of the roof. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. expand Views (all). 17 On the Tools toolbar. expand Sections (Type 1). 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press CTRL. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Next. 21 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and select the second wall. press TAB. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). The roof should resemble the following illustration. 19 On the Tools toolbar.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. 26 On the View toolbar.24 On the Options Bar. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click model. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint.

expand Views (all). 3 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.rvt. and click Yes.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 5 On the Options Bar. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. verify that Defines slope is selected. and enter 600 for Overhang. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. expand Floor Plans. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.

13 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and click OK. under Dimensions. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 11 Press CTRL. 8 On the Options Bar. 15 On the View toolbar. clear Defines slope. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. Next. click Modify. click (Properties). By default. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. select both slope definition lines. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click the model. click Finish Roof. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

When you complete the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Level 3. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. clear Defines slope. press TAB. expand Views (all). After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. m_Roofs. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.

15 On the Options bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Modify.6 Click to select all the walls. Next. add new slope lines to the roof. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). 17 When you see the informational dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Finish Roof. 10 On the View menu. sketch the chimney opening. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. 9 Using automatic snaps.

m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. select Defines slope. click Pick Walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.18 On the View toolbar.rvt. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Lines. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 7 On the Options Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. clear Defines Slope. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 11 To trim the first line segment. using the following illustration for guidance. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical slope definition line. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 On the Options Bar. and click (Pick Lines). 9 On the Tools toolbar. close the roof sketch.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click (Trim/Extend). trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.

click Roof Properties. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 14 Under Constraints. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Finish Roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.21 Click (SteeringWheels). join the two remaining walls to the roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 10 To trim the first line segment. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 6 On the Options Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. m_Roofs. press TAB. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and double-click Level 2. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.rvt. clear Defines Slope. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. click (Trim/Extend). expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. enter 0 for Overhang.

19 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 16 Under Constraints. and double-click 3D. click 20 On the View toolbar. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand 3D Views. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Roof Properties. (SteeringWheels). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. you add a slope-defining line.rvt. and press ENTER. Next. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines slope. and click OK. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572.

click Slope Arrow. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. you need to add two reference planes. Next. Before you can add slope arrows. Next. click Ref Plane. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. To help locate the position of each split. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the View menu. 4 In the Project Browser. click Split Walls and Lines. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 14 On the Options Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and double-click Level 2. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. expand Floor Plans. 11 On the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Offset. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Modify. expand Views (all). clear Defines Slope. add two new slope arrows.

and then click OK. expand Floor Plans. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.rvt. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. (Properties). the adjacent eave heights must align. and double-click Garage Roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. When eave heights differ. enter 500 for Rise/1000. and click 19 Under Constraints. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. select Slope for Specify. and move the cursor to place the arrow. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 20 Under Dimensions. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 18 Press CTRL. When you sketch a hip roof. click Edit. click Modify. expand Views (all). 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.15 to add the second slope arrow. 16 Repeat steps 13 . m_Roofs. select both slope arrows. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. 1 In the Project Browser.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays.

on the Options Bar. on the File menu.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). click Save As. 14 If you want to save your changes. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Dimensions. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. select Defines Slope. click Align Eaves. When aligning eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. and click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. The eave lines display with a dimension. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select a method to align the eaves. (Properties). Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . click Finish Roof. 13 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar.

click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. (Properties). 4 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. and double-click North. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. expand Elevations. on the Options Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Constraints. click Training Files.rvt. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise.

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. Next. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and then select Defines slope. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click . click (Pick Lines). 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Floor Plans.6 On the View toolbar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Lines. and double-click Level 3. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and click OK. under Dimensions. and select the remaining three lines. 7 In the Project Browser.

NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. you add a roof to a building shell. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. click mansard roof. click Save As.17 On the View toolbar. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you add the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. on the File menu.

4 On the Options Bar. 5 In the drawing area. double-click Roof.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Pick Walls. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. and that Overhang is 0' 0''.

click Roof Properties. 7 On the Tools toolbar.Because the walls are not continuous. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls. click (Trim/Extend). 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Insulation on Metal Deck . 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar.EPDM. for Type. and click OK. select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof.

Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. and click to select it. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. click (Draw Split Lines). You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. The roof has been created. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . 16 On the Options Bar.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to open the section view.

18 Move the cursor down.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . move the cursor horizontally to the left. 20 Using the same method.

You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . click (Modify Sub-Elements). click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. exact placement of the points is not important. You modify the points individually. Next. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. on the Options Bar. In this exercise. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. 23 On the Options Bar. (Add points). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected.

25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. and press ENTER. click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. enter -2''. for the dimension.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

and on the Options Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and press ENTER. for Elevation. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. 29 On the Design Bar.27 Press and hold CTRL. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . including the interior edges of the roof regions. click Modify. 31 Select the roof slab. click (Properties). Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. enter 4''.

select Variable. click Edit. 37 If you want to save your changes. gutters. and soffits. The entire slab is sloped. and save the exercise file with a unique name. for the Thermal/Air Layer. 36 View the results in the section view. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and Soffits In this lesson. Creating Fascia. you can easily create its fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. Gutters. 35 Click OK 3 times. gutters. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. In some cases this type of slope is desired. Creating Fascia. and Soffits on page 586. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. you learn how to create roof fascia. under Construction. click Edit/New. Gutters. By making the insulation layer variable. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. on the File menu. and soffits in Revit Architecture. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs .The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Save As. After you create a roof. for Structure. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result.

Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . and click OK twice. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click (Properties). click Training Files. click Training Files. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 8 In the Name dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. under Construction. and click Open. 3 Press CTRL. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click OK. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. enter Built-up Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.

Creating Gutters on page 588. click (Properties). c_Condominium. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 2 On the Options Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building.rvt. 13 On the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise.

click Edit/New. and click OK three times. click in the Value field for Material. Creating Soffits on page 590. under Construction. . and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 6 In the Type Properties dialog.3 In the Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and click OK. 10 Click to place the gutter. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters | 589 .

click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. c_Condominium.Creating Soffits In this exercise. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.rvt. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Views. you learn how to place a roof soffit.

8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. and then select the soffit to join them. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Tools menu. click Finish Sketch.4 Select the roof. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. Creating Soffits | 591 . and double-click 3D.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Save As. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.9 If you want to save your changes.

You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. select Millimeters. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. under Length. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select mm. and open Common\c_Area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different. select Square meters. 593 . In the final exercise. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. click Training Files. If you are using metric units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. 2 In the Project Units dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Click OK. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Under Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Finally. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. For Unit Suffix. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. click Project Units. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans.

click OK. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. or 0. click Settings. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. click the Area Schemes tab. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. right-click in the Design Bar. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Click OK. and click Room and Area. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click the Room Calculations tab. select m2. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. These schemes define spatial relationships. expand Views (all). it is not necessary in this exercise. For Unit Suffix. the system-computed height defaults to the level. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. select 2 decimal places. 4 In the Project Units dialog. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. 9 Click Cancel.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. rather than the area tag. If you select No. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. 12 When the informational dialog displays. click Area. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. To modify the area. 13 In the Project Browser. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area Plan. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you must manually add these boundary lines. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. When you select Yes in this dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. under Views (all). The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. forming a closed loop. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must select one of the reference lines. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog.

Expand Area Plans (Rentable). A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. you create a new area plan for rentable space. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Next. When you add area boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. and store area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. When you pick the walls. Click OK. common areas. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. If you do not select this option. click Area Plan. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 21 On the Options Bar.

28 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. and click to select the area. click Modify. click ■ ■ . Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click Area. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.23 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model.

click ■ ■ ■ . 32 On the Options Bar.■ Click OK. Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. click Area. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Select Office area for Area Type. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Modify and select the area. 31 On the Design Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

enter Core for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.■ Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model.

rvt. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 37 On the File menu. and click to place the legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. name the project Area-in progress. In the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. In this exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. click Save.Notice that within the two store areas. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.

click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Areas (Rentable). and click OK. under Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

If you modify a massing face. roofs. 603 . Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. At any time. You assign the default wall. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. building elements. volume. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. After you make building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. and perimeter information. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. floors. you then need to update the building face. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. After creating mass floors. you can specify the view to display massing elements.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. In this tutorial. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. floor. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. and floors. curtain systems. or both.

3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. double-click Level 1. click Training Files. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. sweeps. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. and click Massing. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. click Create Mass. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and cutting geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

click Lines. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. select Mass (Opaque). 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 13 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. (Line). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. 8 On the Design Bar. (Pick Lines). enter 1550 mm. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. enter 25000. and click .6 On the Sketch Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click Extrusion Properties. 10 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Floor Plans. for Name. for Extrusion End. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. for Offset. and click OK. click 18 On the Options Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click (Default 3D View). double-click Level 1. click the value for Material. and on the Options Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar.

25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. double-click {3D} to see the results. and click OK. under Constraints.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 28 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 30 In the drawing area. select Pick a plane. enter 25000. enter 27500. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. select Mass (Transparent). 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. for Extrusion Start. for Extrusion End. 23 In the Materials dialog. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. highlight the larger form. 21 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. The second form is on top of the first form. click the value for Material. and click OK. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). press TAB to highlight the entire face. TIP If necessary. click Finish Sketch. double-click West. under Views (all). under Views (all).

click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. and clear Chain. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Next. click (Arc passing through three points). click Lines. and click to select the line start point. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). click (Draw). 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.31 Click to select the face. and on the Options Bar. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 .

608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 45 In the Project Browser. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 39 On the Design Bar. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). on the Options Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and delete the vertical construction line. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Edit Top. 46 On the Design Bar. click (Move). click Modify. under Views (all). click the arrow next to the drawing options. double-click East. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. (Line). click Lines and. 41 On the Edit toolbar.

you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 53 On the View toolbar. click Blend Properties. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Sketch. In this exercise. 52 On the Design Bar. and click OK. (Arc passing through three points). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. click 49 Create an arc as shown. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. In the next exercise. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 50 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. for Material.48 On the Options Bar.

select the mass. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Ref Plane. double-click Level 1. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids.rvt. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 1 In the Project Browser. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans. 7 Using the same technique. as shown. 4 On the Options bar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 2 In the drawing area. click Lines.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. and select Chain. click (Line). under Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar.

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. snap the corners to the intersections. click (Default 3D View). Using Swept Blends | 611 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Click OK.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 17 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. When sketching each extrusion. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. In this exercise. 14 Under Constraints. enter 0. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 13 On the Design Bar. on the View Control Bar.

click Sketch 2D Path. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. ■ For the radius. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. select a point below the mass elements. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. m_Massing_Start. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. and click Lines. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. double-click Level 1.rvt. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass.

and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Rectangle). verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Default 3D View). as shown. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click Profile 1. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. and click Edit. click Finish Path. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 10 On the Design Bar. The only way to align these elements is visually. 9 On the Options Bar. click Lines.

as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Align). Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Profile 2. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. 15 On the Design Bar. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. and press ESC. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 17 Using the same method. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Finish Profile.

click <By Category>. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar.18 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. 22 Click OK twice. select Mass (Transparent). 21 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. and click . click Finish Swept Blend. click Finish Profile.

In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Mass.rvt. Finally.24 On the Design Bar. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You then load that mass family file and others into a project.

and click OK. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click Apply. for Height. enter 18000 mm. and click Apply. 8 For Width. and click Apply. and for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog. enter 46000mm. for Width. enter 6000 mm. enter 9000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. for Height. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Depth. and for Name. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. under Other. In this exercise. click New. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 6 For Width. 7 Click New. for Height. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 15000mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. click Training Files. and click OK.rfa. click Family Types. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 18000 mm. and click OK. enter 12000 mm. enter 68000 mm. 5 Click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Depth. enter 11000 mm. for Depth. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK.rfa.

(Show Mass) to show the massing model. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. double-click Site. under Views (all). and Triangle.rfa. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Type Selector. Semi Barrel Vault. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Training Files. click Place Mass. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rvt. as shown. Arc Dome. 1 If not already selected.rfa.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 6 Open the Box-Training. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. on the View toolbar.rfa. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rfa family files. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.

select Rotate after placement. 14 In the Type Selector. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 Press CTRL. 11 Select the box. and click OK twice. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. specify Mass (Opaque). 16 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click (Element Properties). and click to place the mass. and on the Options Bar. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. as shown. enter 90 for Angle. 24 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 25 In the drawing area. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. select the 3 boxes. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. select the triangle. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 21 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . specify Mass (Opaque).26 Select the triangle. and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. click (Default 3D View). specify Mass (Transparent). for the Material parameter. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click Place Mass. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 33 On the View toolbar. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties).

(Join Geometry). click (Default 3D View). you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . In this exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. NOTE When you join geometry. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. In the next exercise.

on the Edit toolbar. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. click (Mirror). under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing .3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.

click (Draw). Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. Joining Mass Elements | 623 .8 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result. enter SM. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. for Axis. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and then select the triangle. (Join Geometry). click 14 On the Tools toolbar.

rvt.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 1 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Window menu. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click (Add to Design Option Set). click Modify. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. you joined mass elements together. (If Design Options is already selected. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing .In this exercise. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. do not clear the check mark. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise.

select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. select Rotate after placement. and click (Element Properties). Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 5 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sloped (primary). clear Curved. enter 90. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Place Mass. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. for Angle. 17 In the Type Selector. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. under Views (all).4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 14 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. and click OK. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for the Material parameter.

22 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Modify. While pressing CTRL. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. specify Mass (Transparent). select the three arc domes. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). for the Material parameter. click (Add to Design Option Set). under Views (all). It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. and watch the status bar. and click OK twice. under 3D Views. and click (Element Properties). 23 On the View Control Bar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. TIP To find the correct shapes. double-click {3D}. 28 In the Project Browser. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. select Curved. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. double-click North. clear Sloped. and click OK. under Elevations.

35 On the File menu. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Make Primary. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved and. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. click (Design Options). 31 Click the value for Design Option. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you can make it the primary option. under Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you placed mass elements into Design Options. and click Close. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click the Design Options tab. In this exercise. 34 Close the warning that displays.

under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. you pick massing faces to create walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Loc Line. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files.rvt. double-click {3D}. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 5 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click (Pick Faces). 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View toolbar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Wall Centerline. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast.Brick on CMU.

NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Views (all).The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. double-click Level 5. 8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 16 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 3.

22 Select all the faces shown in red.18 Select all the faces shown in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 9. under Views (all). 19 In the Project Browser. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 20 On the View Control Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. click Wall by Face. If desired. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Floor Plans.

In this exercise. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. double-click {3D}. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. click Mass Floors. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. and exterior surface area. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. under Views (all). Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. and click OK. When you select levels. select all levels. 8 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Curtain Systems. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. volume. 4 Click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. perimeter. 6 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

click Mass Floors. 10 Press CTRL. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. select Levels 1-4. 11 On the Options Bar. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Modify. and click OK.

click Mass Floors. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 15 Press CTRL. and click OK. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view.14 On the Options Bar. select Level 1.

and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. press and hold SHIFT. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.In this exercise. under Available fields. select Mass Floor. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. 4 Using the same method. schedules can be created using the mass floors. under Category. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. and select Level. and click OK. select Floor Area. and click Add. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Floor Volume. Floor Perimeter.rvt. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. The Floor Area.

enter Retail. for Usage. for Sort by. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. and click OK. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type.

click Edit. 13 With Usage selected. under Other. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. After you assign usage. for Fields. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Remove. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. under Scheduled fields (in order).Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Select Level. and click Properties. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing .

18 On the Filter tab. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. and click Rename. 19 Click OK twice. select Usage. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. and plan views. and click Properties. for Sort by. 16 On the Formatting tab. 23 In the Rename View dialog. enter Hotel. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). for Field formatting. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 24 In the Project Browser. select Floor Area. click Edit. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. under Other. for Filter by. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Calculate totals. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. under Fields. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. for Filter. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. elevation. select Level. in the field under Filter by. 27 Click OK twice. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. for Then by. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. click Edit. and in the field below.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select Grand totals. for Filter. and click OK. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 20 Click in the title of the schedule.

floor perimeter. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt. The mass floor schedules list. click Roof by Face. you created mass floor schedules. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). by level. you pick massing faces to create roofs. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.In this exercise. the floor area.

5 On the Options Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.400mm. select Basic Roof : Generic . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . click Create Roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

in the Type Selector. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. and Walls. 12 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 15 Click the Model Categories tab.8 Using the method you just learned. 13 Using the same method. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. In this exercise. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. Curtain Systems. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Curtain Panels. and click OK. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. click Create Roof. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Sloped Glazing. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.

select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. click Create System. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press CTRL. double-click {3D}.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face.rvt. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . verify that Select Multiple is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar.

In this exercise. you change the size of an existing mass family.rvt. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

and click (Element Properties). click Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. and click OK. double-click Site. Curtain Systems. and Walls. and then click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . under Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. for Width. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Next. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Roofs. click Modify. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View menu. clear Exclude Design Options. clear Curtain Panels. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 6 On the Design Bar. Floors. 7 On the Options Bar.

12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. In the next steps. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all).10 Open the 3D view to see the result. under Floor Plans.

click OK. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click (Default 3D View). 16 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the roof as shown. Also. you want to select the smaller one.TIP To select the curtain wall.

19 Select the arc dome curtain system. click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Remake.

double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. 1 Open the 3D view.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.

650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 8 Click None to clear the selection. under 3D Views. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. click All to select all categories. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Massing only. right-click {3D}. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 4 Rename the view 3D .

In this exercise. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. This concludes the massing tutorial. You might create the model shown. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof. to the building shell.

652 .

Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. and typical office layouts. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. You mirror one instance of the group. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. When you make changes to a nested group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. or with those working on a different project. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. you not only simplify their placement. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. You can also nest groups within other groups. hotel rooms. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. 653 . After you create a model group. place. Modifying. The new group is considered nested within the host group.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. all instances in the building model are updated. Creating. In this exercise. By grouping objects. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. the host group is also updated automatically. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. you also simplify the modification process. In another exercise. In this tutorial. and modify repetitive units. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. For example.

Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all).■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter ZR. 2 Click in the drawing area.

click (Group). 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . enter Typical Kitchen. and click OK. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar.

8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Design Bar. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin.

right-click Typical Kitchen. 12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. under Groups. and click Create Instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. click Modify. expand Model.

select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. clear Copy. 15 On the Options Bar.14 On the Edit toolbar. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Mirror). 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. and on the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click (Rotate).

660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. click Modify. one mirrored. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated.

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. click Save As. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click Save. Modifying a Group In this exercise. and click to select it. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. press TAB to highlight the wall. When you finish editing. Modifying a Group | 661 . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. you make changes to an instance of a group.

NOTE To display an excluded element. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. and click to select the wall. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. click Modify. press TAB. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. 8 On the Design Bar. press TAB.).). select the element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.).).3 Click (Group Member.

select Basic Wall : Generic .Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Door. move the cursor to the left. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 13 On the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . 15 On the Options Bar. click Wall.127mm. click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 10 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement.

move the cursor up. All other elements in the model are grayed out. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 23 In the drawing area. click Modify.17 On the Design Bar. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . In edit group mode. click Edit Group. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall.

and click OK. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. which acts as the host. 26 Select the opening. created in an earlier lesson. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups In this exercise. click Modify. 29 On the group editor toolbar.25 On the Design Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. click 28 For Base Offset. (Element Properties). click Finish. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. enter 2134. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. you add the Typical Kitchen group. enter 1000. and on the Options Bar. Nesting Groups | 665 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. under Constraints. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group.

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click Edit Group. under Floor Plans. in the Project Browser. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. double-click First Floor.rvt. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar.

select the wall between the folding doors. double-click Second Floor. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. 7 On the group editor toolbar.6 Press TAB. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish. 8 In the Project Browser. Nesting Groups | 667 .

Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. and filled regions. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping .10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. such as text. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click First Floor. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. such as door and window tags.rvt. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. In the next exercise. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to a group.

3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . and select a point below the left elevator. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to draw a rectangular region.

Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and click OK. click Text. click (Group). Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 16 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 9 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 Enter Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. click to add an arc leader. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click Modify. as shown. and select the text note and the filled region.

22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the drawing area. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators.18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Modify. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and click Create Instance. under Groups. Because the detail group contains variables. expand Detail. double-click Second Floor. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.

672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. double-click First Floor. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rvt. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. clear Leader. click Tag ➤ By Category.manner that a drawing component can be added. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. as shown. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

7 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. select Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). 8 In the Filter dialog. for Attached Detail Group Name. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click Second Floor. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. click Check None. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group).

NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 16 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you can then work with it in the context of the new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 14 On the Options Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. therefore. click Modify. click Place Detail. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects.

or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. accept the default template file. and click OK. and expand Model. and click Create Instance. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). 3 For File name. and click Open. select 2 Bedroom Unit. click Desktop. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 5 In the New Project dialog. for Create new. verify that Project is selected. and click Save Group. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save. In this case. under Groups\Model. click Modify. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. A warning dialog displays. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.rvt. expand Groups. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. browse to the Desktop. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. verify that Same as group name is selected. click OK.

click Remove Link. When a group is converted to a link. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. expand Revit Links. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. and the link is removed.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. select the linked Revit model. click OK. 23 In the confirmation dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. verify that Attached Details is selected only. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Use Existing. 24 In the message dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Bind. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.rvt.

and walkways. You add property lines manually. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. islands. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.Site 19 In this tutorial. 677 . After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. Using Site Tools In this lesson. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. you add a building pad to the site. and then modify the data. convert the data to a table.

enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. 4 On the Options Bar. and double-click Site. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. This project file was created using the default metric template. In the second part of this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. you create a toposurface using two different methods. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. and click Site.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Using the first method. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Toposurface.rvt. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . click Training Files. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_First_Project. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

12 On the Settings menu. 15000mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . click Site Settings. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 12000mm.8 On the Options Bar. Use the following illustration as a reference. enter 1500mm. click Finish Surface. and 18000mm absolute elevations. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. under Increment. 11 On the Design Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. and click OK. under Additional Contours. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.

and double-click South. 14 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click Modify. on the Standard toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. enter 1000mm. 16 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . under Views (all). click to view it at various angles. click to delete it. modify the level names and elevations. click the elevation value. Before importing the contour data. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 18 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

23 Click the Level 1 text. and press ENTER. and click OK. 29 Select the imported topography. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Verify that Current view only is not selected. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. For Layers. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Specify. select Preserve. click Pin Position. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Until it is exploded. under Views (all). For Colors. Click Open. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog.21 Click the Level 2 text. under Floor Plans. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Yes. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . it is considered an import symbol. 28 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. click Training Files. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. rename the level Basement. double-click Site.

select it. click Modify. clear C_INDX. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. When you select the import symbol. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and.31 On the Design Bar. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Toposurface. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and then click OK. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 32 On the View menu. 34 Under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. clear Elevations. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Visibility/Graphics. when the edges highlight. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 36 On the Design Bar.

684 | Chapter 19 Site . 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. click Finish Surface. click (SteeringWheels). Using the first method. and click Save. name the project Site-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click (Default 3D View). this project file is required in its current state. 39 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines on page 684. you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.rvt. 40 On the View toolbar.

do so before continuing. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Click Modify. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 685 . On the Design Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 4 On the Design Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. double-click Site. click Property Line. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Site-in progress. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. select Create property lines by sketching.rvt. and click OK. If you have not completed the previous exercise.

Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Property Line. to delete them. and click OK. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. when they highlight. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. select the lines. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. on the Standard toolbar. add an arc line on the right. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Property Lines dialog.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 15 Starting in Row #1. 19 In the Tags dialog. Adding Property Lines | 687 . If the gap is not closed. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. click to place the property lines. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.

you created two sets of property lines. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click to place it. 30 On the View Control Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. and click OK. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line.rfa. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. 23 On the View menu. The tags display more prominently in this view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click in the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Tag ➤ By Category.dwg and click OK. 25 Under Visibility. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.20 Click Load. this project file is required in its current state. In this exercise. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In the final step. 22 In the Tags dialog. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 27 On the Options Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. click Training Files. and click Drafting. In the next exercise. clear Leader. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.

2 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. Under Subcategory. click New. select Working Contour. enter 1000. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. under Contour Line Display. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select a shade of Brown. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Under Line Color. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Object Styles. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Under Range Type. for Subcategory. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. enter the name Working Contour. Under Line Pattern. select Dash dot. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 7 Click OK. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Single Value. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. and click OK.0mm. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. In the Object Styles dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise.rvt. Site-in progress. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Topography. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.

11 Click OK. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. parking areas. In this exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Working Contour. and islands. and islands. you create subregions in order to define roads. you create topographic subregions to define roads. The object style subcategory. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. parking areas. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. such as material. In the next exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. The next exercise requires a new training file.

and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Although the exact dimensions are not important. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. click Lines. and open Metric\m_Site.rvt. try to replicate the location and proportion. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion.

Tarmacadam for Name. under Identity Data. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties. under Materials and Finishes. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. and click OK. 692 | Chapter 19 Site .NOTE In the Metric training file. click the value for Material. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK. and click to open the Materials dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. select Site . 6 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. enter Parking for Name. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 .9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. under Floor Plans.Tarmacadam. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. As you create new subregions. and double-click Topography Schedule. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. double-click Site.

Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Within each subregion. click Lines. 20 On the View Control Bar. Delete overlapping lines. Notice that the project area has increased. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 22 On the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. In this training project. 17 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Site.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. click Subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. under Floor Plans.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data.Grass for Name.23 In the upper-right parking area. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 28 On the Design Bar. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 24 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click to open the Materials dialog. select Site . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . 30 In the Project Browser. enter Island . click the value for Material. under Schedules/Quantities. click Properties. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. 29 On the View Control Bar.

Name the subregion Walkway. click Subregion. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. Notice that the schedule has been updated. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site . 34 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 32 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. 696 | Chapter 19 Site .walkway. double-click Topography Schedule. 35 On the Design Bar.Grass. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Lines.31 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island Grass. under Floor Plans.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. there is still only one toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Notice that the schedule has been updated. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule.

Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points.rvt. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans. and click Save.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. When you use the grading tool. 2 Select the toposurface. double-click Site. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

RELATED For more information regarding phasing. see the tutorial. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click (Element Properties). under Phasing. select Copy Internal Points. 8 Select the topographic surface. Using Phasing on page 761. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Select and Edit. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. click Graded Region. 5 On the Design Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 .3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. select Existing for Phase Created. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. and click OK. click Modify.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . demolished.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Options Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. click (Default 3D View). 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.13 Press DELETE. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 17 On the Design Bar. click Point. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Surface. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.

under Phasing. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you create a building pad. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.20 On the View toolbar. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. click View Properties. specify Existing for Phase. this project file is required in its current state. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. under Phasing. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. and click OK. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click to view it at various angles. only the original toposurface displays. click View Properties. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 24 On the View menu. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Only the graded topography displays. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. and delete it. Therefore. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . When you add a building pad. and click OK. (SteeringWheels). 23 Select the toposurface. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. specify New Construction for Phase. you can delete it.

you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. 2 On the View Control Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE By default. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . If you have an existing building model. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.rvt. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. click Pad.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. double-click Site. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area.

Adding Site Components on page 706.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. click (Default 3D View). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . Notice the new building pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. this project file is required in its current state. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 8 On the View toolbar. 9 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. and select the parking space. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Modify.rvt. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.90 deg. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. click Parking Component.Adding Site Components In this exercise.

TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 707 . 8 On the View toolbar.

click Site Component. 12 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. choose any tree type. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. Notice the new parking spaces. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site. under Floor Plans. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser.

16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. In the following illustration.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 14 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 15 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click (SteeringWheels).

click Hidden Line. 5 On the View menu. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. this project file is required in its current state. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. click Apply. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Apply. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. and click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged.rvt.

you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. outside of the site. Click again to the left to position the leader. In the following exercise. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. 8 On the Options Bar. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 .Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. Click up and to the left. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. as shown: 10 Using the same method. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. to position the shoulder of the leader. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. click Modify. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 Press and hold CTRL. 11 On the Design Bar.

this project file is required in its current state. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a parking schedule. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.■ Clear Leader. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 14 On the Design Bar. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.

13 In the Parking Schedule. 6 Click the Formatting tab. click the Fields tab. and click Add.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Add. enter Size. The parking schedule is displayed. Site tutorial-in progress. and under Heading. select Parking for Category. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Available fields. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 9 On the Window menu. If necessary. 11 On the Window menu. 5 Under Available fields. 7 Under Fields. click Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans. select Type. under Views (all). 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and under Heading.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Space. and click OK. select Mark. 8 Under Fields. enter Space. 10 In the Project Browser. select Mark. click Tile. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . 12 In the Site plan. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. double-click Site. select Type. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK.

Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

716 .

Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. A workset is a collection of building elements. such as walls. you must first enable Worksharing. such as annotations and dimensions. you specify an active workset. When you are working on a shared project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. All other team members can view this workset. After the project is shared. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. however. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . Using Worksharing. and so on. select the desired workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. In this tutorial. floors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. called Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. stairs. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Elements specific to a view. go to the Worksets dialog. doors. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. Working in a shared project In a shared project. and click Editable. You can enable Worksharing for any project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. To make a workset editable. use Element Borrowing. you can select which worksets are open or closed. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. The first time you activate worksets within a project. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project.

When setting up Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. After learning the fundamentals. Instead. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You should have at least one workset for each person. and View worksets. such as a tenant interior. for a typical project. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Experience has shown that. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. In most projects. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building.dialog. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. In a multi-story structure. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In the next exercise. Shared Levels and Grids. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . not including the Project Standards. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team.

with each assigned a specific functional task. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. On this tab. if a workset named Interior was created. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When you create a new workset. As new members create worksets for their own use. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. When creating the new worksets. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. designers work in teams. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing.Team member roles Typically. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. For example. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Regardless of the default setting. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view.

however. Therefore. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . your changes propagate to the entire team. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When you save to the central file. proceeds as usual. When you save locally (to your local file). This is called “Selective Open. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you should then save to your local file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. As you work. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. This makes them available to other team members. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. your changes are saved. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. When you save to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. within the local file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. After saving to the central file. On the Options Bar. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. Generally.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you make that workset editable by you. the file is saved as the central file. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. When finished or at regular intervals. you can select which workset is active. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. However.

change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. reload the latest changes from the central file.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. When working remotely. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. and then save the local file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you work no differently then you would in the office. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. make any required worksets editable. save to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. In this situation. In the next exercise. Alternatively. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. if you know who checked out the required workset. you should check out the Materials workset. In this conceptual exercise. To do this. and make that workset editable. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. using VPN. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. In this instance. for instance. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you can make the workset Editable at Risk.

Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. click Worksets. click Training Files. and open Common\c_Worksets.rvt. and notice all are editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. The Worksets dialog displays. under Show. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. When you enable worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Your username displays as the present owner. In the left pane of the Open dialog." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 3 In the Worksets dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you.

For example.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. under Identity Data. When you initially activate Worksharing. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 9 Click New. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . In this simple training project. Because the interior walls appear in many views. you can rename the default workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 17 On the Options Bar. Project Standards. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. ■ 5 Under Show. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. expand Floor Plans. and Views. 8 Click OK. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. In this case. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. 12 Click Rename. 14 In the Worksets dialog. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. In this training file. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Only User-Created worksets should display. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 16 In the drawing area. clear Families. however. another is assigned the interior layout. type the name Exterior Shell. currently named Workset1. it is better to make them visible by default. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. a small number of team members are working on the building model. You do. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. Therefore. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. click OK. clear Visible by default in all views. click New. 13 In the Rename dialog. expand Views (all). select Workset1. 11 In the Worksets dialog. and double-click Level 1. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. imagine four users including yourself. and click OK. click .

22 In the Element Properties dialog. stairs. 21 On the Options Bar. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 26 On the View menu. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . select Interior Layout for Workset.19 Click OK. 29 Click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. including the interior doors. under Identity Data. click Visibility/Graphics. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. and walls. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click .

you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. In this exercise. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click . If any interior elements remain. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 34 In the drawing area. 30 On the View menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click Worksets. click Save As. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK. click Non Editable. 39 Click Save. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 42 On the right side of the dialog. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 44 On the File menu. 43 Click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. Now that you have created the central file. 35 On the Options Bar. 32 Select Interior Layout. click the Worksets tab. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select Interior Layout for Workset. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 33 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). under Identity Data. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 41 In the Worksets dialog. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. 38 In the Save As dialog. under Floor Plans. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Close. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . and click OK. created new worksets to accommodate each team member.

8 In the File Save Options dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. 13 On the Window menu. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. In addition. and click OK. check out worksets. expand Views (all). select Interior Layout for Name. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 6 On the File menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 11 In the Worksets dialog. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you create your local file. 12 Click OK. and select Specify. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. make modifications to the building model. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Next. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In this case. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 15 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Open dialog. click Save As. select Interior Layout. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Before working on the model. click Open. and double-click Level 1. select all the User-Created worksets. click Options. click Worksets. 4 Click Open. 7 In the Save As dialog. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. and click Save. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. please do so before continuing. select the central file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and select Yes for Editable. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. and click OK. If you have not yet completed the exercise. expand Floor Plans. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset.

Because this element is not owned by another user. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. On the Options Bar. 24 Click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 On the File menu. If this is selected. 21 On the Options Bar. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. click Modify. however. 20 Under Constraints. and click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. In the Worksets dialog. click . If it was owned by another user. click . notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. click Worksets. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. In this case. under Identity Data. you can still edit this wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Verify that it is cleared. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 22 Click OK. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice the Editable Only option.

32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. click Door. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 34 In the Type Selector. 26 Delete the door. The precise location is not important. click Modify. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.126mm Partition (2-hr). 31 On the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 29 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.

you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Borrowed Elements is selected. At the end of a work session. you should relinquish all worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. and reload the latest changes. a tooltip. Whenever you save. In this particular case. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. In this exercise. Throughout the process. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. For training purposes. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. In addition. By default. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. When working in your local file. it is recommended. you created your local file. make elements editable. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you should perform regular saves. leave this file open in its current state. which matches the information in the Status Bar. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. save to central. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. and save locally immediately afterward. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. click Save to Central. displays the workset as well as the element type. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. each user must check out worksets. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . If you have not yet completed these exercises. checked out worksets. You modified the building model. please do so before continuing. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them.

16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 3 On the Settings menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. under Username. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. and reset the Username to your computer login name. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You now have a local copy of the project. select the central file. click Options. one user has already created a local file. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. return to the Settings dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. click Open. This is a system setting. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 4 Click the General Tab and. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. click Worksets. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). 15 On the File menu. In addition. specifically sequenced. and select Specify. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and select Yes for Editable. and click Save.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. User 2: Create a local file. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. For training purposes. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. select all the User-Created worksets. and click OK. 7 In the Open dialog. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. enter User 2. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. instructions are staggered. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. In the following section of this exercise. 9 Click Open. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. and click OK. 11 On the File menu. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. This file is for your use only. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. click Options. and click OK. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . consider that person to be User 1. 12 In the Save As dialog. skip the following section.rvt. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As.

If it is not open. 19 On the File menu. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Save to Central.” 29 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . and move it upward approximately 2 meters. and double-click Level 1. 23 Click OK. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.You are now the owner of that workset. modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. open it now. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. expand Views (all). expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 24 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. click Worksets. expand Floor Plans. If you only have one workset checked out. User 1: Check out worksets. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. it becomes the active workset. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. select the lower exterior wall. 17 Click OK. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. 27 On the File menu. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes.

enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Reload Latest. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. However. right-click Level 1. click Save to Central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Views (all). click Worksets. you should create a furniture plan view. 46 In the Project Browser. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 33 On the File menu. Before adding any furniture. 44 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. When you save to central. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 43 In the Project Browser. The changes User 2 made are apparent. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and click OK. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 45 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall.” 35 Click OK. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Click Yes. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Save to Central. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 37 On the File menu. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

61 Click OK 2 times. Therefore. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.” 55 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 60 In the Rename dialog. select Project Standards. and click OK. 66 On the File menu. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 63 In the Worksets dialog. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Exterior Wall . click the Worksets tab. 65 Click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. 48 In the Type Selector. 53 On the File menu. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. choose any desk. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. and click inside any room. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save to Central. click Component. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Modify.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Rename. are placed under Project Standards. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. and click OK. click Edit/New. such as Wall Types. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser.200mm. 49 On the Design Bar. rather than Families. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. and click Element Properties. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 50 On the View menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. under Show. 62 On the File menu. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Save to Central.

At the appropriate point in this exercise. leave this file open in its current state. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. This exercise requires two users and. leave this file open in its current state. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. There are specific instructions for each user. Checking out worksets. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and published their changes back to the central file. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. As each of you work. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select Save to Central. modified the building model. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 70 On the File menu. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. you need to set up your central and local files. click Training Files. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. and still have your local files open. and these problems are rectified. click Options. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Save As. 3 In the Save As dialog.rvt. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. select the following. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. select Reload Latest. Each user must have network access to the central file. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. finished the previous workset exercises. User 1: Reload latest. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and save 69 On the File menu. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. Each user checked out worksets. and click OK. In subsequent steps. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. you save the training file as a central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. throughout this training.

click Options. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. The central file should still be open. select the central file. Next. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. This is the local file for User 1. On the Settings menu. 6 On the File menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click Save. click Open. and click Save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 15 Click Open. click Save As. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 12 On the File menu. click Options. 5 Click Save. This is a system setting. 8 In the Save As dialog. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and reset the Username to your computer login name. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click OK. 17 On the File menu. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. In addition. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 13 In the Open dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select Make this a Central File after save. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Set the Username to User 2. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Options. click Save As. and select Specify. and click OK.

click Worksets. and click Open. click Worksets. double-click Level 1. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. select them. 29 On the Options Bar. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Worksets dialog. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the second window from the top. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 26 In the Worksets dialog. click the File menu. and then click OK. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. select Exterior Shell. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 24 Under Active Workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. select the Interior Layout workset. 27 Under Active Workset. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. You are now the owner of that workset. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . At this point. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select Interior Layout. After you submit the request. Afterwards. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 30 On the left exterior wall.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click Check Now. In this multi-user exercise. you requested permission to edit the element. and notice the window is in the new location. and click OK. select Save to Central.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . 40 In the Save to Central dialog. and close 39 On the File menu. 35 Click Grant. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. to Local. 36 Click Close. 38 Click OK. and the other user granted it. In this case. select the request submitted by User 2. click Close. select the following.

738 .

Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. In this tutorial. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. After you and the client agree on the final design. and each option set can have multiple schemes. The client has asked you to create various options. Using design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. 739 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In addition. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. For example. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In this particular case. At any time in the design process. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you can have multiple sets of design options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option).

The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. TIP In this exercise. each is constructed for interchangeability. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. therefore. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. the roof and structure systems must work together. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. the only available command is to create a new option set. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. After you create a design option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. click Edit Selected. and delete the unwanted options from the project. click New. click Training Files. In the second exercise. and click Close. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you design each of the structural options.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. In the final exercise of this lesson. With the second option. you set up multiple design option sets. you can edit it. under Option Set. In the left pane of the Open dialog.In the first exercise in this lesson. each with multiple design options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. 2 In the Design Options dialog. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. make your final design decision.

Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . add three columns. 11 On the Edit toolbar. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. In the following illustration. In this case. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. By selecting Multiple. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only.4 In the Project Browser. or add a dimension string between the columns. click Modify. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. and the third column centered between the two. expand Floor Plans. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 7 In the Type Selector. select: ■ ■ ■ . 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). TIP To center the middle column. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click 12 On the Options Bar. click Column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.

they are difficult to see in this view. When you are finished. click . 18 On the View toolbar. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. Because of the size of the columns. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 17 Zoom out and. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process.

The first click specifies the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. and click at its center to set the beam start point. The second click specifies the end of the beam. you add the beams that span the columns. 23 On the Design Bar. Zoom in on the upper right column. 21 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Next. Adding a beam is a two-click process.Notice the 12 columns that you added. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. In it. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. select Round Bar : 50mm. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . click Modify. click Beam. 24 Select the Beam you added previously.

and click the center point. 28 Zoom out.25 On the Edit toolbar. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click . 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . and select the center of the column to add a copy. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar.

Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option. click Rename. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 45 Under Roofing. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. under Option Set. click New. name the option Louvers. not a new option set. click New. 36 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. under Option. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. click New. click Rename. and click OK. 46 Under Option. click Rename. enter Beam for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 33 Click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . enter Roofing for New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 40 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. and click OK. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 32 In the Design Options dialog. under Option. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. 43 In the Rename dialog. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. 38 In the Rename dialog. select Option 1 (primary).

48 Under Option. it will resemble the following illustration. Under Now Editing.47 Under Roofing. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 53 In the Project Browser. When finished. This allows you to more easily manage the project. click Rename. double-click ROOF TERRACE. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 52 Click Close. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Structure. you create the second design option. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 51 Under Edit. select Option 2. select Edit Selected. name the option Sunscreen. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. select Beam. 50 In the Design Options dialog.

select M_Roof Beam. Refer to the following illustration. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 58 On the Tools menu. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Component. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.

click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and. The first click sets the move start point.60 After aligning the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

rvt. click Save As. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 67 On the Tools menu. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 .Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. which is visible by default. name the file. 70 On the File menu. 66 On the View toolbar. click . and click Save. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 69 Click Close. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. you need this file in its current state. click Finish Editing. m_Urban_House-in progress. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

open it now. In the next exercise. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. under Roofing. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and double-click TOP OF CORE. With the second option. 10 Referring to the following illustration. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. do so now.In this exercise. select Louvers (primary). you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. 6 In the Project Browser. delete them after the rafter is in place. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. If you need to add dimensions. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. 8 In the Type Selector. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. expand Views (all). you design each of the roofing options. 5 Click Close. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. a Louver system. you set up multiple design option sets. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. each with multiple design options to pick from. 2 On the Tools menu. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 4 Under Edit. Sunscreen. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display.rvt. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The first option. click Component. Under Now Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. expand Floor Plans. the other for beams. click Edit Selected. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. The second roofing system. 3 In the Design Options dialog. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise.

You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 11750 mm for Length. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click . Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . Select 2nd for Move To. and click OK. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Select Constrain. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. under Other. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Edit menu.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Enter 5 for Number. click Array. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press ENTER. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. enter 990. when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and.

click the Edit menu. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 23 On the Options Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. enter 5475 mm for Length. and select the louver you just placed. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 With the louver still selected. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Select Constrain. and click Array. click . under Other. 26 On the Options Bar. click Component.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Enter 34 for Number. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. click Modify. 27 For the array starting point. and click OK. 20 In the Type Selector.

and. enter 300.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. when the listening dimension displays. 29 On the View toolbar. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press Enter. click .

under Roofing. and double-click West. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. 31 In the Design Options dialog. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. and click OK. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. click Finish Editing.The louver roof system is complete. select Sunscreen. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. In this case. click Edit Selected. 39 On the Design Bar. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 33 Under Editing. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 37 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Elevations. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. Therefore. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. click Lines. under Edit. Click OK. and then click Close. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 30 On the Tools menu. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click . 34 In the Project Browser.

then the center arc. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You will fix this in a later step. the top of the next column on the right. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. Under Constraints. click Finish Sketch. 49 On the View toolbar. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 41 Select the top of the left column. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. then you can modify it through the dimension. click Trim/Extend. Under Constraints. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. click . The arcs should connect. The first two points define the ends of the line. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. and the third point defines the arc. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Select the right arc. 46 On the Tools menu. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. 45 Click OK. 43 On the Design Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 On the Design Bar. click Properties.

52 On the File menu. Managing Design Options In this exercise. and click Rename. The second roofing system. 2 In the Project Browser. you select a design. 3 In the Rename View dialog. After exploring the combinations. In this exercise. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. do so now. expand 3D Views. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 50 On the Tools menu. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. and click Duplicate. click Finish Editing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. tertiary. right-click {3D}. Managing Design Options | 757 . and then click Close. a Louver system. and last options. Sunscreen. you designed each of the roofing options. under Views (all). under 3D Views. enter Primary Option. and click OK.The louver roof system is complete. click Save. The first option. under Views (all). under Edit. secondary. 51 In the Design Options dialog. you need this file in its current state. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 4 In the Project Browser. and delete the discarded design options. make it part of the building model.

click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Design Options tab. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Views (all). 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under Views (all). under 3D Views. and click Rename. 11 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Primary Option. click Visibility/Graphics.5 Right-click each of the copies. 9 Click OK. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. double-click Secondary Option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab.

specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option.14 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 15 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Last Option. under Views (all). and click OK. under Views (all). under 3D Views. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. double-click Tertiary Option. In your design options. click Visibility/Graphics. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. Managing Design Options | 759 . under 3D Views. In this case. 19 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. At this point. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option.

click Accept Primary. made it part of the building model. select Beam.22 On the Tools menu. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. the current primaries are no longer options. click Yes. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 29 Select Roofing. double-click Primary Option. 27 In the alert dialog. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Delete to remove the views that used options. This was the client choice for structural. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. you selected a design. 25 Select Structure. 26 Under Option Set. 23 In the Design Options dialog. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. and deleted the discarded design options. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 30 Under Option Set. click Delete. 24 Under Option. 33 In the Design Options dialog. click Close. since you no longer need them. An alert is displayed. select Make Primary. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. In this exercise. Because the client has selected the design option. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 31 In the alert dialog. After exploring the combinations. The set is deleted. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. under Structure. click Yes. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Save. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog.

complete with schedules. 761 . You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. demolish existing walls and doors. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. This changes room definition and total building model area. You create new phases. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. and then add new building model elements. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. demolish existing construction.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. For the client. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases.

you work in a simple model that requires renovation. 6 On the Options Bar. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings.rvt. click (Element Properties). As you add new elements to the building model. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. click Modify. under Phasing. click Training Files. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. expand Floor Plans. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. click Project Units. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. regardless of phase. This means that all building model elements. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . under Phasing. 4 Click Cancel. expand Views (all). are visible in this view. go to the Settings menu. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and open Common\c_Phasing. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. define the units. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. 7 Click Cancel. During the demolition and renovation process. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and double-click Level 1. When you create a new project. If you wish to do so.

11 In the Filter dialog. click . and click OK. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. After you release the mouse button. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). right-click Level 1 . under Floor Plans.Existing. 16 In the Rename dialog. Phasing Your Model | 763 . enter Level 1 . and click OK. are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 . all of the building model elements. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 10 On the Options Bar. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. TIP If this were a multi-story building. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. right-click Level 1. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. After you create the views. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. 20 In the Rename dialog. clear Door Tags. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. Because this is a renovation project. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. including the door tags. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 . click Modify. select Existing.Existing. Because this is a phase-specific view. 17 Click No.Existing. and click Rename. for Phase Created. 18 In the Project Browser. under Phasing.Demo.

A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. for Phase. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. under Floor Plans. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 21 In the Project Browser. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. double-click Level 1 .Demo. 27 Click New. and click OK. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because of this time relationship. Phase status is time-dependent. 29 For Composite Plan. under New. however. select Existing. Later in this exercise. and Temporary. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. select Overridden.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. In this case. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. under Phasing. 28 Under Filter Name.Existing. to which all the building model elements belong. enter Composite Plan. Next. you modify these settings. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. under Floor Plans. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Demolished. There are five default phase filters. Existing. double-click Level 1 . 24 In the Project Browser. click the Phase Filters tab. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 26 In the Phasing dialog. You may need to zoom in to see this. new construction occurs after existing construction. On a logical time line. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases.

38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. click the value for Color. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. select a lighter blue. under Cut ➤ Lines. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 36 Using the same method. Next. 39 In the Phasing dialog.Existing. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 32 In the Demolished row. under Floor Plans. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. you demolish all elements hosted by it. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Demolished. click (Demolish). under Floor Plans. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. 34 In the Color dialog. double-click Level 1 . select red. select the interior walls one at a time. you begin demolition. As you click each wall. When you demolish the host. 35 Click OK twice. 42 In the Project Browser. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. its display changes to a red dashed line. or you can use the demolish tool. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. click OK. select the line style.31 Under Phase Status.Demo. double-click Level 1 . specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. There are two ways to demolish an element.

and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 51 Add a door leading into each room. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. click Wall. 52 Open Level 1 . add a long horizontal wall. under Phasing. and click OK. 47 In the Type Selector. The demolished walls no longer display. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 53 Open Level 1 .4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Phase Filter. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Existing. select Show Previous + New. and click OK. for Phase Filter.Demo. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 50 In the Type Selector. 49 On the Design Bar. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Door. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Basic Wall: Interior .

New. regardless of phase. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 59 Open Level 1 . which are displayed as red. because the phase filter is set to Show All. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 62 If necessary. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 57 In the Project Browser. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. The renovated building model plan is displayed. click (Default 3D View). All elements are displayed in this view. right-click Level 1 .New. 61 On the View Control Bar. new is shown in blue. 60 On the View toolbar. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed.Demo. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.

and new construction. and click OK. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units.Existing. 2 Open Level 1 . If you wish to do so.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In the next exercise. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. define the units. the rooms change in both definition and size. All room boundaries are phase-specific. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. demolition. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). go to the Settings menu. expand Floor Plans. therefore.New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Open Level 1 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this view. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. As the renovation process continues. If you wish to save this file. and double-click Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model.rvt. 63 Close the file.Demo. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can do so at this time. click Training Files. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. sizes. In this view. In this exercise. You can also see that the room quantities. Notice that this view is the original building model. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags.

Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. click Room. and maximize the view. click Room Tag. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 .New.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. 5 Click OK. In the Phasing dialog. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. click Modify. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Room. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Existing. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. Use the following illustration as a guide. click in each room as you move to the right. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 10 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Demo.

19 On the Window menu. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.New Construction. 18 Open Room Schedule . That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction.Existing. 17 On the Window menu.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. 20 Close the file. expand Schedules/Quantities. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. View phase-specific room schedules. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. The two schedule views tile. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. In this exercise. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . In this case. click Tile. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. click Close Hidden Windows. 16 In the Project Browser. and double-click Room Schedule . In addition.

and manage the links throughout the project. In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Comparison of alternatives on a site.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. You position the building models on the site plan. performance. This maximizes efficiency. In this tutorial. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In the final lesson. modify their visibility. 771 . Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures.

One building model is a condominium. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. modify their visibility. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. You position the building models on the site.Linking Building Models In this lesson. and the other is a townhouse. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .

click Training Files. Click Open. c_Condo_Complex. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. and click OK. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. right-click. ■ ■ Manual . 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. RELATED See the lesson.■ Auto . use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. you can do so. Auto . with write permission. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. and save the file there. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. this system is not exposed to the user. select the three files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . 4 On the File menu. click Close. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. 8 Clear Read-only. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. c_Townhouse. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. this option will place the link at a predefined location. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . All three files now reside. and open Common\c_Site. This option is grayed out.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. in the Model Linking folder that you created. click Open. Select c_Site. however. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. and click Properties. click Save As.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789.rvt. click Open. Otherwise. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. 5 On the File menu.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Manual . 2 On the File menu.

select Auto . and double-click Level 1. If you wish to do so. and make your changes. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Notice the blue detail lines. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. For Positioning. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 13 Click Open. you can go to the Settings menu. 11 On the File menu. expand Views (all). click Import/Link ➤ Revit. click Project Units.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. expand Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex.Origin to Origin.

Standard move commands work with linked building models.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. 17 For the move endpoint. The first click specifies the move start point. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The second click specifies the move endpoint.rvt displays in the Type Selector. The Move command requires two clicks. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . After you select it. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. 16 For the move start point. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The linked model moves as one object. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 21 Click Open.After you specify the location to move to. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. For Positioning. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 18 On the View menu. select Auto . click Import/Link ➤ Revit. and select c_Townhouse. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .Origin to Origin.

the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. To rotate an object.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. In this case. click (Rotate). and click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 23 On the Edit toolbar. click to specify the rotation start point. when the vertical line displays. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move). Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The Copy command works much like the Move command. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. 30 For the starting point. The first click specifies the start point. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse.

click . and click OK. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 35 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 On the View toolbar. 34 On the Options Bar. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. enter Townhouse A. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click Rotate. 32 On the Edit menu. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. use the Move command to make any adjustments. under Identity data. for Name. click (Default 3D View).

you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you need this project file open and in this view. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. they were placed too low within the site topography. After linking the files. do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In the next exercise. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click (SteeringWheels). If you have not completed the previous exercise. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels.38 On the File menu. When you originally linked the files. In this exercise. click and hold Orbit. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . In this exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the SteeringWheels. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise.

you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. the status bar displays the name of the linked file.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. When using the Align command. and click to select the line. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and double-click South. and click OK. Click the Revit Links tab. and then select the plane that you want to align. In the steps that follow. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. under Views (all). 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. expand Elevations.rvt. and click to select it. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. when it highlights. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. To do this. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. click (Align). In this case. 3 In the Project Browser. you first select the plane you want to align to. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. 7 On the Tools toolbar.

click and hold Orbit. under Elevations. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 9 In the Project Browser. 14 On the SteeringWheels. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. 11 Return to the South elevation view. 15 On the File menu. click 13 On the View toolbar. double-click North. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. 12 On the View toolbar. click Save. (SteeringWheels). This would over-constrain the model.

click OK. 8 For Annotation Categories. or Custom. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. detail level. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. When you link a file. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. By linked view. you can independently control the visibility settings. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 4 Under Visibility. double-click South. and the halftone settings for each linked project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. As you can see. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. In the next exercise.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Visibility/Graphics. click By Host View.rvt. scroll down and clear Levels. In this exercise. do so before continuing. click Custom. you need this project file open and in this view. expand c_Townhouse. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. under Elevations. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. 9 Under Visibility. display settings. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. 2 On the View menu. select <Custom>. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 10 Click OK. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view.

Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project.rvt. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. expand c_Townhouse. double-click Level 1. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . no detail level changes are required. In this case. select Custom. By default. 24 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 22 Click the Model Categories tab.rvt. You can click the value for Detail Level. and click OK. medium. and then set the detail level to coarse. or fine. By selecting custom under Model Categories. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. on the Basics tab. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. 23 In the Model categories list.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click Visibility/Graphics. under Display Settings. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 14 On the View menu. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click By Host View. Using the Custom option. 20 For c_Townhouse. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. With linked files. under Floor Plans. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. select <Custom>. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex.

29 Click OK. With the Show All filter applied. select c_Townhouse.rvt. this is preferable. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. all new. 26 Under Display Settings. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. existing. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. In this case. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. and phase filter of a specific link. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. click Save. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. phase. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 25 On the Revit Links tab. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. under Visibility. In this exercise. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. there are situations. 28 Select By linked view for View range. In this case. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. on a sloped site for instance. demolished. click OK. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. you manage the linked files. In most cases. In the next exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. However. All other components are grayed out. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 31 On the File menu.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. By default.

If you have not completed the previous exercise. 7 Click OK. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. the link is maintained. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click the Revit tab. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. 4 Under Linked File. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. They supply information regarding the links. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. In general. Notice the Loaded. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. and Saved Path fields are read only. 3 Under Path Type.rvt. In a shared coordinate environment. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. click Manage Links. click Yes. You learn more about this in the next lesson. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. The default path type is Relative. Locations Not Saved. select c_Condo_Complex. 5 Click Unload. do so before continuing. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. 6 At the confirmation prompt. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 .

When you initially place the link. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. In these cases. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. 9 On the File menu. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. click Save As. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. the link is not loaded. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. and select Specify. If you choose not to open that workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. and click Reload. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. 8 In the Project Browser. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated.rvt. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. To do this. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. expand Revit Links. In general. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. right-click c_Condo_Complex. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. click the arrow next to the Open button. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. However.

you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. name the file Site_Project.10 In the Save As dialog. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). In the next lesson. In essence. and save it as an RVT file. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. When you share coordinates between projects. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. and the resulting project files. When used in conjunction with model linking. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. leave the project file open in its current view. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. do so before continuing. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In this exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. The host file consists primarily of site components. you are establishing a shared origin point.

click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. click Open. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt.rvt and click Open. In this case. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. 3 In the drawing area. do so before continuing. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. If you have not completed the lesson. When you are working in the host project. click the Condo Complex. As indicated in the Status Bar.coordinates are used. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. and the resulting project files. Select Site_Project. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. 2 On the Tools menu. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have closed the project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. open it before continuing. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Linking Building Models on page 772.

you need this project file open and in this view. when the edges highlight. and Lot C. but can have multiple additional locations. click to select it. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. 5 On the Design Bar. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. In this exercise. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. and click OK. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. do so before continuing. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. If you have not completed the exercise. These three locations can be named Lot A. Lot B. even though both models originate from one linked file. select Location 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. However.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. On the Status Bar. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. it is placed at a specific location. this location is not saved outside of the host project.

click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. click Change. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. 12 On the Options Bar. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 4 Under Value. enter Lot A for New. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. and click OK. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. When constraining a link to a location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. click Rename. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click OK. select Move instance to. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Record the current position as a location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. and click OK. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. This is a one-time operation. click Not Shared for Shared Location. under Instance Parameters. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click Reconcile.2 On the Options Bar. In the Choose Location dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. under Instance Parameters. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. click . 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. .

click OK. click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . ignore the warning. Because Lot A is currently in use. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. and click OK.Notice the OK button is not active. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. Record current position as. and click OK. When you release the mouse button. 30 On the Tools menu. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. enter Lot B for Name. and then select the townhouse project. Notice the OK button is still not active. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 23 Click Save Locations. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. a warning displays. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. click Duplicate. click the Revit tab. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 26 Click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. The second click specifies the move endpoint. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. or cancel the action. The first click specifies the move start point. select the second option. click Manage Links. and the left townhouse resides at that location. This is a two-click process. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. the active location position is moved. When you create a location. you cannot redefine its location. make sure Lot B is selected. To explicitly save a location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. By relocating a project. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. When you relocate a project. 16 Click Change. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. and click OK. Save locations 21 On the File menu. 19 In the Select Location dialog. select Save. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B.

and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. and click OK. In this exercise. click Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. NOTE In the following exercise. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. click Close. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 36 On the File menu. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. you work in one of the linked projects. select Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 33 On the Edit menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 34 On the File menu.

if other models were linked into the same host. When opening the linked file. Click Open. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . In addition. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. do so before continuing. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. 2 On the File menu. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. select Auto .By Shared Coordinates. click Open.rvt file. If you have not completed the exercises. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. it is placed automatically within the host project. double-click 1st Floor. Also. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise.rvt file. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Because this building model only has one named location. under Floor Plans. The current active location is Lot A.

In this exercise. click Manage Place and Locations. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Duplicate. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. do so before continuing. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. you create a new location. click OK. and click Make Current. click Manage Place and Locations.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. orient a view to true north. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. In the host file. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. and click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. under Graphics. 7 Click OK. select True North for Orientation. you can select Lot C if necessary. enter Lot C. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. 6 Select Lot B. 3 In the Name dialog. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. click View Properties. and click OK. If you have not completed the exercises. you manage the shared locations. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.

Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. If you have not completed the exercise. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. 10 On the File menu.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. On the Options Bar. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin.rvt and click Open. click Open. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. do so before continuing. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. You can save the file if you wish. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. click Close. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . In this exercise.

select Doors. click Schedule/Quantities.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click the Fields tab. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 5 Under Available fields. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Count. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category.

You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click Close. and then click OK twice. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 13 On the File menu. under Other. 12 Select Grand totals. click Save. clear Itemize every instance. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Click OK. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. expand Schedules/Quantities. You have completed this tutorial. and click Properties. select Family and Type for Sort by. right-click Door Schedule. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. In this exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 14 On the File menu. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

you create an office template. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Browse. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. they are not saved to project files or template files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. notification preferences. These settings control the graphics. click the Graphics tab. journal cleanup options. selection default options. 10 In the Options dialog. 4 Under Colors. click the value for Selection color. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In the first lesson. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 803 . 8 In the New Project dialog. you modify the system environment. Finally. and set it as your default template. under Template file. and click OK. which is independent of the project settings. In the second lesson. 3 In the Options dialog. 11 Under Colors. and your username when using worksets.rte. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. click Training Files. select Invert background color. Notice that the drawing area is black. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the New Project dialog. click OK.

specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. click Training Files. 22 When prompted to save changes. select yellow. click Modify. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. and click OK. select One hour. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. For Tooltip assistance. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. For Selection color. clear Invert background color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . However. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 19 On the Design Bar. select None. click Modify. and select the wall. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Wall. 13 Click the General tab. 15 Click OK.12 In the Color dialog. the elements causing the error display using this color. and open Metric\m_Settings. 14 Under Notifications. click No. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. When an error occurs. 26 In the Options dialog. select red. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. click the Graphics tab.

and click Open. family template files. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. centralized. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. select your preferred Save reminder interval. 10 In the Places dialog. click Browse. However. you can start a new project with that template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). under Default path for family template files. Your login name displays by default. For Tooltip assistance. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. If prompted. 8 Click Cancel. click the File Locations tab. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. 7 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. TIP To view a template. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Under Username. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 2 In the Options dialog. click Browse. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. select Normal. This path is set automatically during the installation process. and click Browse to select a template. 3 Under Default template file. Under Journal File Cleanup. you specify default file locations. and family libraries. including your default project template. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click Places. Specifying File Locations on page 805. such as in a large. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 4 Click Cancel. click Browse. These files are used in the software support process. notice the list of library names. do not save the changes. 5 Under Default path for user files. select the folder to save your files to by default.27 Click the General tab. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close.

or loading a Revit Architecture file. saving. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). 11 In the Places dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. templates. and click the icon side of the field. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. under Libraries. Load. and you can create new libraries.library names and path. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select it as the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. and click Open. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and change the name to My Library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Save. In the following illustration.

and click OK twice. Load. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and decal image files. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 5 In the text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 3 Under Settings. click Edit.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. 22 Click Places. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. This path is determined during installation. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. If you want to relocate this path. click My Library. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 9 In the text editor. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 28 Click OK. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 15 Under Library Name. such as bump maps. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. specify the new location here. and Import dialogs. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 19 Click Cancel. click the Spelling tab. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. scroll down the list of building industry terms. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 23 Select My Library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click the My Library icon. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Save. If you work in a large office.

click OK. click Restore Defaults. As you zoom in and out within a view. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 19 Under Settings. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase.rte. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 In the text editor. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Text. click Training Files. In this exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. click the Spelling tab. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 18 In the Options dialog. 23 In the Options dialog. 14 Click in the drawing area. If prompted. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU. do not save the changes. 4 In the New Project dialog. you modify snap settings. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. click Modify. under Template file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Browse. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling.11 In the Options dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click default template. work with snapping turned off. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 22 In the text editor. you modify snap increments. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .

use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. clear Chain. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor to the right. 10 On the Options Bar. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click OK. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If you do not have a wheel button. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. click Wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. zoom out until it does so. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. For example. 7 Under Object Snaps.. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action.6 Under Dimension Snaps. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. and enter 500 . enter SM. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. While sketching. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out.

15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and do not save the file. and specify the wall endpoint. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 21 Move the cursor downward. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click Modify.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and the wall edges. 18 Enter SM. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. This is the increment that you added previously. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Modifying Project Settings on page 811.. and click Wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 24 Click OK. the midpoint. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and move the cursor to the right. If you move the cursor along the wall. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Do not set the wall end point. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and delete the value 500 .

You create and modify materials. click Training Files. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. lines. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.rvt. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . and open Metric\m_Settings. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you apply a material to an element. In the steps that follow. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and object styles. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. fill patterns. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. annotations. Using these options. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. save the project file with a unique name. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Finally.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you render a region to observe the changes. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.

Masonry . expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 10 Click the Graphics tab. and texture of the material. 3 Click (Duplicate).Fieldstone. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. When you change properties of a render appearance. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. When a model element is loaded into a project. 9 Click Apply. 6 Click Replace.Fieldstone material. and double-click 02 Entry Level. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project.Fieldstone. These details will display in rendered images. 11 Click OK. 2 Scroll down the materials list. enter Masonry . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. In the steps that follow. scale. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. However. In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. In the next exercise. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. and select Masonry .Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. read-only library for render appearances. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The properties describe the color. The Render Appearance Library is a local.Stone. select Stone. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. for Class. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click (Element Properties). and click OK.

It is currently assigned the material Masonry . All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 16 Enter the new wall name. click Edit/New. click (Default 3D View). Fieldstone on CMU. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 17 For Structure.Fieldstone.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 While pressing CTRL. click Edit. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 22 Select the left exterior wall. and click OK. click in the Material field. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. and click OK. select Masonry . 26 On the View Control Bar.Brick. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 21 Click OK three times. select the rear exterior wall. . 25 On the View toolbar. 18 For Finish 1. 15 Click Duplicate. 24 In the Type Selector. click Model Graphics Style.Fieldstone. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click This is the material that you created. 20 In the Materials dialog. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry .

29 In the 3D view. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. In the following exercise. 31 In the Rendering dialog. and click Rendering. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click Rendering Dialog. When finished. click Render. select Low or Medium. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. under Quality. select Region. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. select the render region (a red rectangle). right-click the Design Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 28 In the Rendering dialog. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. for Setting.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. The rendering process begins. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate.

Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 3 Under Pattern Type. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . in the Rendering dialog. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. select Custom.rvt. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. 7 Under Custom. expand Elevations. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. click Import. Zoom into the model. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Drafting pattern density is fixed. such as steel. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. click Show the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference.rvt. and clear Region. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and double-click West. 5 Click New. Then click Render again. click Show the model. choose Model. 34 Close the Rendering dialog.

notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. select Model. 9 Under Custom. click Edit/New. under Pattern Type. (Element Properties).pat. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. and click OK. enter .Fieldstone material. 11 Click OK. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows.Fieldstone. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Under Surface Pattern. select fldstn. click Modify. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. In the Materials dialog. click OK. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . click in the Material field. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. and click OK. 22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click 15 For Structure.56.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. for Finish 1. 10 For Name. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. enter Fieldstone. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click Training Files. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and for Import scale. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click to select a fill pattern. click Edit.

Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 2 On the keyboard.25 On the View toolbar. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. For example. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. you can set the window frame material to By Category. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. adjust your zoom settings as needed. click (Default 3D View). The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. TIP If the pattern does not display. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3 Windows. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles | 817 .

for Trim Exterior Material. click Modify. 14 In the Materials dialog. . click Edit/New. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. under Materials and Finishes. for Trim Exterior Material. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click . 9 Click OK twice. 8 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click in the Value column. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.3 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). 16 On the Design Bar. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. click in the Value column. click By Category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 10 Select the arched window. click By Category (located under the materials list). click (Element Properties). 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click 15 Click OK twice.

enter Trim . click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog. select Paint. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. for Name. When you render a 3D view. and select Trim. type red. . Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. 25 In the search field.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.red paint. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. expand Windows. (Duplicate). 19 For Trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . click in the Material column. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and click OK. 28 Under Shading. and click OK. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. 23 Click Replace. or keywords include the word red. click OK. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. for Class. descriptions. select Trim. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog.

is open with the 3D view active. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.rvt. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 7 On the View Control Bar. m_Settings-in progress. select Roofs. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. click New. for Name. 10 For Line Color. under Category. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter Roof Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns.31 On the View toolbar. (Default 3D view). 9 In the Object Styles dialog. select Red. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 11 For Line Pattern. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. select Roof Line.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 .12 Click OK. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. for Visibility.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 19 For Line Pattern. select Blue. select Black. 20 Click OK. For Pattern. click Override. select Solid. select Roof Line. elevations. select 5. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Color. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. select Roofs. under Floor Plans. select Roofs. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 For Line Color. Plans. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. sections. under Category. double-click 03 Roof. 15 In the Project Browser.

select Red. under Floor Plans. This places the line above the topography. double-click Site. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. Click Click (Draw). select 2. click New. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 33 In the Type Selector. select Zoning Setback. (Line). For Line Color. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Level: 02 Entry Level. 34 On the Options Bar. 29 For Name. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. click Lines. enter Zoning Setback. For Line Pattern. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. under Modify Subcategories.25 Click OK twice. specify the following: ■ For Plane. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Double dash. and click OK. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 31 Click OK.

43 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. (Default 3D View). This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and clear Zoning Setback. click (Default 3D View). expand Lines. 40 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. NOTE If Site is not selected. 44 On the View toolbar. select it. 36 On the View toolbar. Expand Site. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and clear Property Lines. 38 On the Model Categories tab. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 39 Click OK. and then clear Property Lines. double-click 02 Entry Level. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Modifying Annotations on page 825.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created.

rvt. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. click Dimension. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 4 Enter the name Linear . and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. click Duplicate. and then click outside the second wall. To place a dimension. 10 On the Standard toolbar. (Undo). 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall.Imperial. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. double-click 02 Entry Level. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector. m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active.Imperial and click OK. select Feet and fractional inches. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. for Units Format. click another wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. and place a dimension on the floor plan. select Linear . 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You have created a new dimension style. under Floor Plans. click Modify. click the default value. click one wall. Modifying Annotations | 825 . 7 Click OK twice. 5 Under Text. For Units.

26 On the Options Bar. under Category. click the bottom window. In the preview image. select the 3 window tags. 19 Click Load. In the steps that follow. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. 16 Click Cancel. notice that the label displays 1i. click M_Window Tag .Number is now the assigned tag. click Training Files. 23 Click OK. 18 In the Tags dialog. 22 Under Loaded Tags. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. Then press Delete.14 On the Options Bar. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click Tag ➤ By Category. Leave M_Window Tag . 21 In the Tags dialog. 27 On the west wall.Number as the assigned tag. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 24 While pressing CTRL.Number. 28 On the Design Bar. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . clear Leader. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.rfa. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. scroll down to Windows. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties).Number. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click Tag All Not Tagged. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.

for Length. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. click the default value. dimension values display using this setting. select Faces. Click OK. Unless overridden. 30 Under Leader. select meters squared. In the second section.Temporary Dimensions. m_Settings-in progress. notice Window Tags appears twice. for Rounding. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. In the final section. 32 On the View toolbar. click Modify. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Temporary Dimensions. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Specifying Units of Measurement. you specify the project units of measurements. (Default 3D View).Under Category. you modify the detail level assignments. select To the nearest 100. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. For Unit symbol. the other displays the instance value. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 3 In the Format dialog. In the first section. 8 Under Walls. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value.Number. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 2 In the Project Units dialog. verify that Create is clear. Specifying Units of Measurement.rvt. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Temporary Dimensions. 31 On the Design Bar. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and click OK. and click OK. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. select Openings. M_Window Tag . Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. for Area. click the default value. and Detail Level Options | 827 . 9 Under Doors and Windows. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 6 Click OK. dimensions use these project settings. and click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Specifying Units of Measurement. select 0 decimal places. Unless overridden. 4 In the Project Units dialog.

temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you create a new view and specify its view scale. 12 Click OK. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. and expand 3D Views. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. expand Floor Plans. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this table. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. click Training Files. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. expand Views (all). You do not select a view scale to move it. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. In this exercise.In this project. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.rvt.

6 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Type/Discipline. and click OK. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. notice that views are grouped by phase. and click OK. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. select Discipline. and click Apply. expand each view type. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . 5 On the Views tab.

expand each sheet set. and click OK. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click OK. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Click the Sheets tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Folders tab. 16 Click the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. under Sheets.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New.

In this lesson. 2 Under Template file. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. levels. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. For example. In that case. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 21 In the Project Browser. under Views. and expand both Architectural and Structural. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Whenever you create a new project or template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Creating an Office Template | 831 . click Browse. View Type (Family and Type). dimensions styles. If you want to save this file. and Discipline. You can choose from several templates. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. navigate to your preferred directory. You can also save these settings in a template file. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. the same rules apply. Proceed to the next lesson. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and click OK. and view names.rte template. and click Open. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. enter a unique file name. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates. When you create a new template based on an existing template. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. In the lesson that follows. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. you select the starting point for your office template. you create an office template. when you create a new project. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. expand Complete. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. expand 3D Views. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Creating an Office Template on page 831.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. When you create new projects. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. and click OK. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

navigate throughout the various views and schedules. in the drawing area. for Create new. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you modify the project settings for your new template. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 15 Under Create new. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. and click OK. 14 Click Open. drag a zoom region around the level heads. For example. 7 In the Project Browser. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 6 Click OK. 12 Under Template File. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. close them. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. weights. In this exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template.5 In the New Project dialog. 13 Select the default template. If you have additional projects open. When you create the material. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. click Browse. and double-click North. you can select it now. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and.

9 Click OK when finished. You do this by defining the render appearance. and change render appearance properties. For more information.During this exercise. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. and scroll through the list of categories. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. line colors. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. and similar attributes. the changes are saved as part of the project template. or refer to the online help. 13 If necessary. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. specific modifications are not dictated. 4 Click Replace. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. transparency. annotation objects. When you create or modify a material. Modifying System Settings on page 803. TIP For more information about creating new materials. If you change render appearance properties. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 2 Scroll down the materials list. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. see the previous lesson. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . texture. you can set line weights. including color. For more details on modifying these settings. or refer to the online help. Observe the materials that are already defined. and move model patterns. create new subcategories. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. You can align. and materials for model objects. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. rotate. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. see a preview of the rendered material. In the Object Styles dialog. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. and imported objects. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. or modify existing patterns. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. create and modify them as needed. line patterns.

Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 34 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. name the style. modify the line weight. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. 29 Click OK. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. select it from this list. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 32 To modify a line pattern. and click Edit. create new line subcategories. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. and specify the properties. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. or line pattern as needed. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and create new subcategories as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. line color. You can add and delete view scales. 18 For existing line categories. tags. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 20 Click OK. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and dimensions. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 19 If necessary.15 Modify categories. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. click Duplicate. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. select it.

You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 50 To load new annotation tags. click Format. name the style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Volume. For example. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. angular. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. To see the details of a particular style. 62 Click OK. click Load. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. and specify the properties. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . and click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 58 Click OK. 53 For Length. 57 Specify the Slope option. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and Angle settings. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 60 Under Walls. 46 Click OK. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag.40 Click OK. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. click Duplicate. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. In the Tags dialog. 55 Click OK. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. TIP In the drawing area. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. Linear. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and choose a decimal symbol. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select it from this list. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog.

rename. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. When you create a new view. In such a case. For example. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. 69 If necessary. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 64 Review the table. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. The detail level is based on view scale. Use the table below as a checklist. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Medium. 68 Delete. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. click the Views tab. However. click the arrows between columns. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. or edit existing organization types. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 71 Delete. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Using the arrows between the columns. 73 Click OK. create new browser organization types. See Setting up If necessary. 65 Click OK.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. In a typical project. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. or Fine. or edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Each command is available on the Settings menu. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 72 If necessary. rename. To move the view scales. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. and move view scales as needed. Although these settings can be saved within a template. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. You can find additional information in Help.

See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. do so before starting this exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. Although the options are endless. However. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. or add to this selection. title blocks. and the poche depth. Although this is possible. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. In the steps that follow. phase filters. You can load any family or group into a template. you can set up the phases. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. the section cut material. furniture. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you have not completed the previous exercise. If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. and electrical fixtures. In addition. you do both. you can set the default contour line interval. For example. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . modify. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Depending on the intended use of this template. notice the list of doors already loaded. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. or use the Project Browser. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. if you load every available window type. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. 2 In the Type Selector. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you may want to delete. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. you could load detail components. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. you can move onto the next component type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. click Door. or electrical fixtures.

Enter a name. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. click Bar. or load a new door type. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Modify type properties. Click Duplicate. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. create. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. create. and click Open. click Edit/New. or modify a door. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. and click OK.3 To modify. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Notice that each family category is listed. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Load. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. Make modifications. and click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. Select it. expand Families. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab.

In addition.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. This title block is currently part of the template. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you created new projects using different templates. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . In addition. load. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. create. and click Delete. and select the title block type. 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 Click Preview. Detail Level. 13 Click OK. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. In this exercise. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Discipline. View Range. (Element Properties). right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. click Load. To load a title block. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. you create the views required for your template.) 10 Expand the title block. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. To do so. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.

under Elevations. click Apply. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. double-click Level 2. Every time a new plan view is created. and click OK. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Plan. At any time. you will first modify view templates. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. open the view from the Project Browser. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 12 In the Project Browser. 18 If you modified any other view templates. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. and click OK. 4 If necessary. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In addition. double-click Site. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 3 Specify each value according to your needs.settings of categories and subcategories. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. and double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 11 Click Apply. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. click Apply. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. double-click South. 15 In the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. 6 Click OK. 2 Under Names. you can apply a view template to any view. In this exercise. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Floor Plans. select Site Plan. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. After applying the template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and then click OK.

26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. review the existing floor plans. or delete them as needed. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. or an edge of the ViewCube. 23 To add more levels to the template. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . and select the desired view. Rename. Black level heads have no associated views. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. a face. select Make Plan View. (Default 3D View). 30 In the Project Browser. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. and. and click Properties. duplicate. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and click Rename. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. use the ViewCube. If prompted. and elevations. right-click {3D}. or delete this view. To orient the 3D view to another view. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. under 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Save View. 27 Create additional levels as needed. Blue level heads have associated plan views. enter a view name. click 29 In the Project Browser. click Orient to a Direction. click Schedule/Quantities. and select the desired direction. 31 Rename the 3D View. 22 In the Project Browser. click Level. duplicate. ceiling plans. right-click Level 1. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. notice that you have the option to rename. right-click the view name. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. click Orient to View. right-click the ViewCube. in the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. If you want to modify view properties. review the floor plans. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. in the shortcut menu. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. If it does not display. under Floor Plans. By default. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view.Notice the level names. To orient the 3D view to a direction. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select the default title block.txt for MicroStation).You can add schedules to a template. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. on the View tab of the Design Bar. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. modify settings as needed. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. On the Filter tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. After the sheet is created. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Right-click the sheet name. assign filters. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Select a view. and click OK. 40 To add views to the sheet. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. click Add View. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You are prompted to select a title block. select and order required fields. expand Sheets (all). 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select one. select the category type. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. To later add a title block to a sheet. modify settings as needed. in the Project Browser. modify settings as needed.txt for AutoCAD. On the Formatting tab. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 42 Create new sheets as needed. and modify their properties accordingly. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. or exportlayersdgn. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. and click Rename. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. On the Appearance tab. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. You can still add views to the sheet. 37 Click OK. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. click Sheet. To do so. select the title block and delete it.

2 For each category. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and click Save. name the file. click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and they become the set mappings for the project. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Using shared parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 5 For each category. for example. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. These settings are retained within the project template. For example. and so on. therefore. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. windows. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. They cannot be shared with other projects.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. name the file. doors. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. 9 Click Save As. When you create a multi-category schedule. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When scheduling. and click Save. You can save these mappings to a text file. and so on. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. name the file. 8 In the dialog. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. When you import a DWG or DXF file. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. and click Save. select Save As. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1.

5 Enter the group name. add required parameters. click New. select Project parameter. select a parameter discipline type. project parameters. 2 Click Create. 6 Create as many groups as needed. you may want to save the file to a network location. and specify its discipline and type. 8 Under Parameters. and choose a shared parameter. If a file already exists. 23 Add project parameters as needed. 18 Under Type of Parameter. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 11 For each parameter group. 21 Under Categories. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and click OK. select a parameter value type. 22 Click OK. 25 Click Select. and select Shared Parameter. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 26 Click OK. click New. 19 Under Group parameter under. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. under Groups. 14 Click Add. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. enter a parameter name. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for Name. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can create a list of parameters. 24 To add a shared project parameter. click Add. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 3 Name and save the file. 9 Name the parameter. 10 Click OK. 17 Under Discipline. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. because each office has a unique set of needs.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a group to add parameters to. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 16 Under Parameter Data. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. For each parameter group. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.

and click Open. and print. you need only select a setting. In this exercise. Click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. enter a name for the schedule. select Multi-Category. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 37 When you have completed the schedule. 2 Under Printer. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 34 For Category. you can load them into the template. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. By creating named settings within the template. For information on creating multi-category tags. 4 Modify the printer settings. and make it your default template file. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. click Setup. 32 Navigate to the directory. 5 Click Save As. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. for Name. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. make minor modifications if necessary. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. By going first to the Print command.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. paper placement. 3 Under Settings. The tag is now part of the template. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. or refer to the online help. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. save the file as a template. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 6 In the New dialog. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. and click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and the percent of actual size. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 28 Click OK. 35 For Name. click OK. For each printer. select the tag. you create named print settings. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.

rte). and click Open. 14 Under Save as type. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. click Browse. You can also set this template as your default template. In addition. click Save as. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. select it. Your template is complete. 20 Click OK. This can provide a good starting point for a template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Click the File Locations tab. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. In this lesson. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. click Setup. save it in a network location. select Template Files (*. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 Click Close when finished. and create new settings for this printer. The only remaining task is to save it. and saved them to a template. 15 Name the template. and click Open. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. and click OK. Create additional settings as needed. By investing the time to individualize your template. modify the printer settings. If you need to share this file with others. 24 Navigate to the template location. 9 In the Print dialog. 23 For Default template file. select a different printer. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 25 Click OK. 18 Click Browse. you modified settings. loaded components. and click Save. If you have a project. In addition. enter a new name for the printer. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 19 Select the template.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful